[PDF] PSION Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

1 PSION Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual (Windows Embedded CE 6.0) July 15, 2013 Part No F ISO 9001 Certified Qualit...

PSION Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual (Windows® Embedded CE 6.0)

July 15, 2013 Part No. 8000211.F ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System

This user manual supports Model Numbers: • 7545MBW • 7545MBWM • 7545MBWP • FCC ID: GM37545MBW, GM37545MBWM and GM37545MBWP • IC: 2739D-7545MBW and 2739D-7545MBWP

This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Inc. This document is not to be used, reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of assisting in proper use of Psion manufactured goods and services by their rightful owners and users. Any other use of this document is prohibited. Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication. Psion Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages including, but not limited to, consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented. Psion, the Psion logo, and the names of other products and services provided by Psion are trademarks of Psion Inc. Windows® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Psion Inc. is under license.

All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

Return-To-Factory Warranty Psion Inc. provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability provided at: www.psion.com/us/warranty.htm

The warranty on Psion manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion service organization. See Psion terms and conditions of sale for full details. Important: Psion warranties take effect on the date of shipment.

Service and Information Psion provides a complete range of product support services and information to its customers worldwide. Services include technical support and product repairs. To locate your local support services, please go to: www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm

To access further information on current and discontinued products, please go to our Teknet site and log in or tap on “Not Registered?”, depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet: http://community.psion.com/support

A selection of archived product information is also available online: http://www.psion.com/products

TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of ContentsTable of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Chapter 2: Basic Operation 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12

Omnii Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Omnii Modules Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Documents Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Preparing the Omnii for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.4.1 The Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Switching the Omnii On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Resetting the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.6.1 Performing a Warm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.6.2 Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.6.3 Performing a Clean Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.6.4 Boot to BooSt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.6.5 Performing a Hard Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Attaching Carrying Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Imager and Scanner Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Voice Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii 3.1 3.2

3.3

3.4

Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Battery Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.2.1 Battery Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.2.2 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.2.3 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.3.1 Regular Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.3.2 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.3.2.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.3.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.3.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.3.3.1 Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.3.3.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.3.4 Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.3.5 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.4.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.4.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

3.5

3.6 3.7

3.8

3.9 3.10

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.5.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.5.1.1 Battery Charge Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.5.1.2 Operating System Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.5.1.3 Radio Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.5.1.4 Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.5.2 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.5.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.5.4 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.6.1 Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Scanners and Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3.7.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.7.2 Scanning Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.7.3 Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.7.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3.7.6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Windows Embedded CE 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.8.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.8.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.8.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.8.2 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 3.8.2.1 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.8.2.2 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 The PsionVU Desktop Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 3.9.1 Restoring the Windows Classic Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.10.1 Caring for the Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.10.2 Cleaning the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Chapter 4: Configuration 4.1

4.2 4.3 4.4

4.5

Overview of Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.1.1 Psion Software Advantage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.1.2 Microsoft Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.2.1 Control Panel Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 App Launch Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Bluetooth® Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 4.4.1 Paired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 4.4.2 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 4.4.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 4.4.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 4.4.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 4.4.2.4 Pairing a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 4.4.3 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 4.4.4 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 4.4.5 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 4.4.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

4.6 4.7

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 4.7.1 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 4.7.2 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 4.7.3 Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 4.8 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.8.1 Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.8.2 Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.8.3 Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.9 Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 4.9.1 Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 4.9.2 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 4.9.3 Motion Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 4.9.4 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 4.10 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4.11 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4.11.1 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 4.11.2 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 4.11.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 4.11.4 AGPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 4.11.5 Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 4.12 Imager & Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 4.13 Input Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 4.14 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 4.14.1 Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 4.14.2 Keyboard Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 4.14.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 4.14.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 4.14.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 4.14.6 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 4.14.7 Lock Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 4.15 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 4.15.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 4.15.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 4.16 Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.17 Open TekTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 4.18 PartnerUp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 4.19 Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 4.20 Power Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 4.20.1 Battery Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 4.20.2 Power Saving Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 4.20.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 4.20.4 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 4.20.5 Built-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 4.20.6 Battery Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 4.21 PsionVU Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 4.21.1 Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 4.21.2 Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 4.21.3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 4.21.4 Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

iii

Table of Contents

4.21.5 Import/Export to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 4.22 Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 4.23 Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 4.23.1 Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 4.23.1.1 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 4.23.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 4.23.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 4.23.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 4.23.2.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 4.23.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 4.23.3 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 4.23.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.23.4 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.23.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 4.24 Screen Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 4.25 Storage Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 4.25.1 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 4.25.2 Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 4.25.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 4.26 Stylus Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 4.26.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 4.26.2 Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 4.26.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 4.27 System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 4.28 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 4.28.1 Creating a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 4.28.2 Creating a Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 4.28.3 Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 4.28.3.1 Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 4.28.3.2 Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 4.28.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4.29 TweakIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4.29.1 Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4.29.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4.29.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 4.29.1.3 Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 4.29.2 Registry Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 4.30 Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 4.30.1 Dialing a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 4.30.2 Receiving an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 4.30.3 Voice Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 4.30.3.1 Call Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 4.30.3.2 Call Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 4.30.3.3 Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 4.30.4 File Menu – Phonebook Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 4.31 Volume & Sounds Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 4.31.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 4.31.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4.32 Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 4.32.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

4.32.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 4.32.2.1 Manually Creating a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 4.32.2.2 Authentication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 4.32.2.3 Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.32.2.4 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 4.32.2.5 Verify Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 4.32.2.6 Enable OPMK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 4.32.2.7 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 4.32.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.32.3.1 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 4.32.3.2 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 4.32.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 4.32.5 Monitoring the Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 4.33 WiFi Connect A.R.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 5: Accessories 5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

Pistol Grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 5.1.1 Removing the Trigger Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 5.1.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Carrying and Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 5.2.1 The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 5.2.2 Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 5.2.3 Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Power Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.3.1 Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 5.3.2 AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 5.3.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.4.1 Important Charger Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.4.2 Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.4.3 Installation — Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.4.4 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 5.4.5 Power Consumption Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 5.5.1 Charging a Battery Installed in the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 5.5.2 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 5.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 5.5.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 5.5.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 5.5.4 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 5.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.5.5.1 Docking station does not seem to power on.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.5.5.2 The Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.5.5.3 The Omnii charge indicator LED is red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.5.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 5.5.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 5.6.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 5.6.2 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 5.6.3 Quad Docking Station Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

5.7

5.8

5.6.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 5.6.3.2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 5.6.3.3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 5.6.4 Cleaning the ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 5.6.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 5.6.5.1 The Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 5.6.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 5.6.5.3 The Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 5.6.5.4 The Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 5.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 5.7.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 5.7.2 Insertion and Removal of Omnii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 5.7.3 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 5.7.4 ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 5.7.4.1 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 5.7.4.2 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 5.7.4.3 Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 5.8.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 5.8.2 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 5.8.3 Charge Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 5.8.4 Charging Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 5.8.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 5.8.5.1 Improper Battery Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 5.8.5.2 Power Self-test LEDs Don’t Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 5.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Appendices Appendix A: Port Pinouts A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4

Omnii Docking Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Snap Modules Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Omnii Battery Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings B.1 B.2

B.3

Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 B.2.1 Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 B.2.2 Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 B.2.2.1 Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 B.2.2.2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 B.2.3 Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Using the Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 B.3.1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 B.3.1.1 Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 B.3.1.2 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 B.3.1.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

B.4

B.3.1.4 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 B.3.1.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 B.3.1.6 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 B.3.2 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 B.3.2.1 Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 B.3.2.2 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 B.3.2.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8 B.3.2.4 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 B.3.2.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 B.3.2.6 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 B.3.3 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10 B.3.3.1 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 B.3.3.2 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 B.3.3.3 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 B.3.3.4 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 B.3.3.5 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 B.3.4 Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 B.3.4.1 Symbology Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 B.3.5 Filter Menu – Manipulating Barcode Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 B.3.5.1 Modifying a Barcode Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 B.3.6 Translation Menu – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14 B.3.7 Advanced Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 B.3.7.1 File Locations for Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 B.3.7.2 Configuring Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Barcode Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 B.4.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17 B.4.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18

Appendix C: Scanner Settings C.1

C.2

C.3 C.4

C.5

Barcode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C.1.1 Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C.1.2 Restoring Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Decoded (Internal) Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C.2.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 C.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) Data Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Decoded (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 Decoded (Intermec ISCP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 C.4.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 C.4.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 Non-Decoded Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 C.5.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D.1 D.2 D.3

SE955 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 D.1.1 SE955 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 SE965 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 D.2.1 SE965 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 D.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

vii

Table of Contents

D.4 D.5 D.6 D.7 D.8 D.9 D.10

SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 D.4.1 SE1524ER Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 EV15 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 D.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 D.6.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 EA20X Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 D.7.1 EA20X Typical Reading Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 D.8.1 HHP 5080SR Working Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11 SE4500SR – Standard Range Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 D.9.1 SE4500SR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 SE4600LR – Long Range Imager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14 D.10.1 SE4600LR Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications E.1

E.2 E.3

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3 E.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3 E.1.2 Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 Wireless Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 E.3.1 Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 E.3.2 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 E.3.3 Model RA2070 802.11a/b/g/n Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 E.3.4 Bluetooth Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10

Appendix F: Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants F.1

F.2 F.3 F.4

The Omnii XT15f Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545XT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3 F.1.1 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4 F.1.2 Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 F.1.3 The Freezer Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) for Omnii Chiller Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh (ST3002) for Omnii Arctic Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7 Quick Defrost Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 F.4.1 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 F.4.1.1 Suspend Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-8 F.4.1.2 Scan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9 F.4.2 Heater Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9 F.4.2.1 Heater System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9 F.4.2.2 Display and Scan Window Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10 F.4.2.3 System Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10 F.4.3 System Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11

Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings G.1

viii

Wireless WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 G.1.1 Taskbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 G.1.2 Establishing a Packet Data Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3 G.1.2.1 Disconnecting From a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4 G.1.2.2 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 G.1.3 Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Table of Contents

G.2

G.1.3.1 Entering a PIN Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 G.1.3.2 Error States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5 G.1.4 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6 G.1.4.1 WWAN Data Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6 G.1.4.2 Security Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9 G.1.4.3 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10 G.1.4.4 Driver Mode Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11 G.1.4.5 Modem Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12 G.1.4.6 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13 G.1.4.7 AT Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14 G.1.5 SMS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14 G.1.5.1 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14 G.1.5.2 Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15 G.1.5.3 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15 G.1.5.4 SMS Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15 G.1.6 Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15 Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15

Appendix H: Wireless Zero Config Settings H.1

H.2 H.3

Wireless Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3 H.1.1 Wireless Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3 H.1.2 Wireless Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-4 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6 H.2.1 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6 Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7 H.3.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7 H.3.2 Deleting A Preferred Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7 H.3.3 Changing Network Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-7

Appendix I: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines I.1 I.2

Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3 Omnii XT15ni Battery Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

INTRODUCTION

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer. Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

.3 .4 .4 .8

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction About This Manual

1.1

About This Manual This user manual describes the configuration, operation, and maintenance of the Psion Omnii HandHeld Computer. Chapter 1: Introduction provides a basic overview of the Omnii. Chapter 2: Basic Operation describes the steps required to get the Omnii ready for operation. Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii describes Omnii features, including how to charge and maintain the battery, the keyboard features, the display, using the internal scanner, etc. This chapter also describes the Microsoft® Windows® Embedded CE 6.0 desktop, and how to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU Shell. Chapter 4: Configuration describes the programs and applications accessed through two main areas from the Desktop Start Menu: Programs and Settings>Control Panel. The software includes both Psion Software Advantage and Microsoft programs, and details how to use them to configure the Omnii, along with scanners/imagers, Bluetooth, etc. This chapter also details the PsionVU program, which enables you to customize your computer settings. Chapter 5: Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Omnii computer. Appendix A: Port Pinouts describes the Omnii and accessories pinouts. Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings describes in detail your imager’s settings. Appendix C: Scanner Settings details your barcode options. Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications lists the specifications for the Omnii scanners and imagers. Appendix E: Omnii Specifications lists the specifications for your Omnii computer, radios, and battery. Appendix F: Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants describes the hardware and heating software of the freezer units. Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings describes WWAN configuration information. Appendix H: Wireless Zero Config Settings outlines the steps used to configure your radio using Windows Zero Config. Appendix I: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines lists the approvals, important warnings, and cautions for the Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Hand-held Computer.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction Text Conventions

1.2

Text Conventions Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.

Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.

Warning:

1.3

These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.

Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer The Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a modular, industrial hand-held computer. A variety of options are available to suit applications in courier/delivery, field service, manufacturing facilities, material handling applications in warehouses, ports and yards, with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. Barcode input methodologies are supported by a variety of available scanners. Optimization for specific operational environments is also supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories. The Omnii XT15f (Freezer Variant) combines modularity, customizability and performance with added technology to resist condensation for use in cold, condensing environments. For details, see “Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants” on page F-1. Note: The Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.

Note: For product specifications, refer to Appendix E: “Omnii Specifications”.

Model Variants • Omnii RT15 Hand-Held Computer (rugged) - Model 7545XC • Omnii XT15 Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged) - Model 7545XT • Omnii XT15f (Freezer Variant) Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged) - Model 7545XT Processor and Memory • Texas Instruments® Sitara AM37xx, ARM Processor 800 MHz (OMAP3® compatible) • Flash ROM: 1 GB • RAM: 512 MB • 3 axis accelerometer Operating System • Microsoft® Windows® Embedded CE 6.0 Bundled Applications • Internet Explorer® 6 • Windows Mobile Device Center • WordPad®, ActiveSync® Supported Applications • Open TekTerm • Stay-Linked Terminal Emulation

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer

• • •

Naurtech Browser Naurtech Terminal Emulation NetMotion Mobility XE VPN

Device Management and Utilities • PsionVU • Total Recall, TweakIt, Dr. Debug • Mobile Control Centre (MCC) - Easy configuration management and provisioning platform. - Powerful remote control and troubleshooting functionality. - Integrated real time geofencing and location services. - Advanced device security, user authentication and lockdown features. User Interface • Colour/Touch Display 9.4 cm (3.7 in) diagonal - VGA (640 x 480) Transflective - High visibility option: superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd/m2 brightness - Extreme Duty option: withstands 1.25 Joule impact, superior low temperature operation (to -20° C/4° F), with 160 cd/m2 brightness. Better abrasion resistance. • Touchscreen - Passive stylus or finger operation; pan and flick gestures supported - Signature capture • Keyboards - Large selection of backlit keypads in both alpha and numeric formats. For a list of currently available keyboard configurations, consult your Psion representative, or go to: http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm • Voice, Audio & Feedback - High volume beeper: 95 dBA - Integrated microphone and speaker - Optional Push-to-Talk Speaker • Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk – VoIP over WiFi or WWAN • Vibration feedback Wireless Connectivity • Integrated Bluetooth® V2.0 + EDR • Integrated 802.11a/b/g/n WiFi • Bluetooth® coexistence • CCX v4 • Optional SIRF III GPS Receiver • Optional GPS/GPRS/EDGE WWAN radio • Optional GPS/GPRS/EDGE with UMTS/HSPA+ WWAN radio Note: 802.11b/g and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.

The following figures illustrate the main features of the Omnii — for detailed views, please see “Omnii Features” on page 11.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.1

Omnii XT15 and RT15 Alphanumeric Variants

Omnii XT15

Omnii RT15

59-Key ABC Keyboard

55-Key ABC Keyboard

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction Overview of the Omnii Hand-Held Computer

Figure 1.2

Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants

Alphanumeric

Figure 1.3

Bottom View (Docking Connector)

Figure 1.4

Top View (Scanner Window)

Numeric

Laser Aperture

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction Regulatory Labels

1.4

Regulatory Labels Figure 1.5 Warning:

Laser Warning Label Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

This label is affixed below the scanner window.

Figure 1.6

SE955 Laser Warning Label

Figure 1.7

SE965 and SE4500 Laser Warning Label

Figure 1.8

LED Radiation Notice Label

Figure 1.9

SE4600 Laser Warning Label

This label is affixed below the scanner windo 8

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

BASIC OPERATION

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12

Omnii Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omnii Modules Available . . . . . . . Documents Available . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Omnii for Operation . 2.4.1 The Battery . . . . . . . . . Switching the Omnii On and Off . . . Resetting the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Performing a Warm Reset 2.6.2 Performing a Cold Reset . 2.6.3 Performing a Clean Start . 2.6.4 Boot to BooSt . . . . . . . 2.6.5 Performing a Hard Reset . Attaching Carrying Accessories . . . Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . Imager and Scanner Options. . . . . Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Communication . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 11 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Omnii Features

2.1

Omnii Features Figure 2.1

Front View of the Omnii XT15 Model with Alphanumeric Keyboard

Speaker

LEDs

Beeper

Display

Scan Key Microphone SYM Key

FN Modifier Key Enter/Power Key

Note: the Omnii 55- and 66-key keyboards are equipped with a Power button. See Figure 3.1 on page 22 for keyboard layouts.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Omnii Features

Figure 2.2

Side Views of the Omnii XT15

Left Side

Right Side

Vertical scroll button

Volume rocker button

Scan button Enter button

Battery release button

Side rail Slot for Snap Module arm

Figure 2.3

Bottom View

1 - Docking Connector 3 2 - Alignment Pin Holes 3 - M2.5 Locking Screws (for firmly attaching devices) 4 - Hand Strap Slot

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Omnii Modules Available

Figure 2.4

Top View

Laser Aperture

End-Cap

Figure 2.5

Back View

Rear PTT Speaker (optional)

Camera Aperture Scanner Window

Scanner Pod

Expansion Back Pistol Grip Attachment Screws (4)

Battery Pack

2.2

Omnii Modules Available To see a current list of Omnii accessories and modules, please go to the Psion website at: http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm

2.3

Documents Available To see a current list of documents and download what you need, please go to the Knowledge Base on the Psion IngenuityWorking community website: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/product-manuals.aspx

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Preparing the Omnii for Operation

2.4

Preparing the Omnii for Operation

2.4.1

The Battery The Omnii is powered by a Lithium-ion Smart Battery pack, 5000 mAh—Model ST3001. Important: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191). Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information, see “Battery Details” on page 21. Replacing the Battery Pack Important: Always switch the unit off before changing the battery (see “Switching the Omnii On and Off” on page 15). However, assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame. Figure 2.6

Omnii Battery Battery Top 1

Contacts

1 1 - Release button 2 - Battery compartment 3 - Guide tabs 4 - Release button tabs

4 3

Battery bottom 3

Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an uncharged battery and use the device while the battery charges. Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, a battery can be removed for up to 4 minutes without losing data. After 4 minutes the terminal may reboot. Removing the Battery Pack • •

If your unit is equipped with a hand strap, unhook it from the base of the battery. Press the two buttons at the sides of the compartment simultaneously, and slide the battery out.

Installing the Battery Pack •

• •

Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit with the contacts matching position and the guide tabs moving into the corresponding slots at the base of the compartment. Click both sides of the battery into place. If your computer is equipped with a hand strap, re-attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery. Switch the unit on (see “Switching the Omnii On and Off” on page 15).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Switching the Omnii On and Off

2.5

Switching the Omnii On and Off Follow the instructions below for your Omnii. If your keyboard has a power button (55- and 66-key keyboards only), press that instead of the [FN]+[Enter/Power] key combinations described. Switching the Omnii On • Press and hold down the [Enter/Power] key for at least one second. When the unit is turned off, normally it automatically enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the Omnii is switched on from the suspend state, within a few seconds operation resumes in the screen in which you were working prior to turning the computer off. Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options: The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Psion battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold. See “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 89 for details. To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery. However, if you supply AC power to the Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on. Switching the Omnii Off • To switch off the Omnii, press the [FN] key and then press and release the [Enter/Power] button. The Omnii will automatically enter the Suspend state. Important: Turning off the hand-held does not result in a complete shutdown; rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the Omnii is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.

Important: If the word ‘FN’ is displayed underlined in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” and the Omnii will not switch off. Press the [FN] key twice followed by [Enter/Power] to switch the Omnii off. However, if you’ve set the mode to “Lock” (see “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 78), the Omnii can be turned off even when the [FN] key is locked ‘on’.

2.6

Resetting the Omnii To perform a warm or cold reset, you can access the menu by going to Start>Shutdown. Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below. Note: If your Desktop is switched to the PsionVU Shell (refer to “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42), resetting the unit is done solely by use of the keyboard shortcuts.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Performing a Warm Reset

2.6.1

Performing a Warm Reset During a warm reset, running programs are halted. The contents of the file system, RAM Disk, Flash Disk, and the registry are preserved. •

Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Enter/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds. Note: You need to reset your Omnii after configuring the radio by switching between Windows Zero Config and WiFi Config.

2.6.2

Performing a Cold Reset A cold reset reinitializes all hardware. All RAM including the RAM Disk is erased. Non-volatile storage such as the Flash Disk is preserved, as is the file system. To execute a cold reset: •

Press and hold down the [SYM] key, the [FN] key, and the [Enter/Power] key, simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds. Note: As part of the normal Windows Embedded CE cold boot process, the screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. The desktop is displayed after a few moments.

2.6.3

Performing a Clean Start A clean start returns the Omnii to factory settings, flushes the registry keys, and deletes volatile storage and the file system. The Flash Disk is preserved. •

Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [Enter/Power] button and the [SCAN] key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds. The Omnii displays the Boot to BooSt menu.

• •

2.6.4

On an alpha keyboard, type .clean. On a numeric keyboard, type .25326.

Boot to BooSt If you choose Boot to BooSt, the BooSt menu is loaded. • •

2.6.5

Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [Enter/Power] button and the [SCAN] key for a minimum of four seconds. Press [1] to launch the OS.

Performing a Hard Reset Important: This procedure is recommended as a last resort, when all other methods fail. To execute a hard reset: • •

Remove the battery. Using a coin, or other conductive item, connect pins 5 and 6 of the battery contacts for at least six seconds.

Pin 6

•

Pin 5

Replace the battery and power Omnii on. The terminal will boot as if from a cold reset.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 2: Basic Operation Attaching Carrying Accessories

2.7

Attaching Carrying Accessories Psion recommends that a carrying accessory — a hand strap — be installed on the Omnii before use. For detailed information, please see “Carrying and Protective Accessories” on page 136.

2.8

Calibrating the Touchscreen Note: The touchscreen function can be turned off (see “Touch” on page 110).

The Omnii touchscreen feature is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen's operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for correct operation. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 27 for details.

2.9

Imager and Scanner Options If your Omnii is equipped with an internal imager or scanner, please review the relevant sections: Appendix B: “Imager & Camera Settings” and Appendix C: “Scanner Settings” for details. Appendix D: “Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” lists their current model numbers, descriptions, and specifications.

2.10

Connectivity For information on connecting the Omnii to a PC, please refer to “Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC” on page 67 The Omnii contains an integrated 802.11a/b/g/n radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles. To configure the radio, follow the steps outlined under the heading “Wi-Fi Config” on page 123. To configure your Bluetooth settings, please go to “Bluetooth® Setup” on page 56. If you have a GPS (Global Positioning System) module, you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem and set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System). See “GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings” on page 72. The Omnii is available with one of the following Wireless WAN radio options: the Cinterion MC75i EDGE and the Cinterion PH8-P HSPA+. See Appendix E: “Wireless Radios” for full specifications. With either of these radios and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data (see Appendix G: “Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings”), and you can use the Omnii voice option to place phone calls (see below, Section 2.12: “Voice Communication”). To see the radio specifications, please go to “Wireless Radios” on page E-6.

2.11

Data Transfer Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. Various options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier, Windows Vista® , Windows 7 or later. For connection details, please refer to “Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC” on page 67.

2.12

Voice Communication If the MC75i EDGE or the Cinterion PH8-P HSPA+ WWAN radio modem is installed and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar. For details on using your Voice options, please refer to “Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer” on page 117. Note: The voice option is not available in North America for the MC75i EDGE radio.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR OMNII

3.1 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Battery Swap Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Regular Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.1 Activating Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . 3.3.5 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.1 Battery Charge Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.2 Operating System Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.3 Radio Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1.4 Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Inserting the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Scanners and Imagers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.3 Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . . . . . . . . 3.7.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . 3.7.6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . 3.8 Windows Embedded CE 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . . 3.8.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2.1 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2.2 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 The PsionVU Desktop Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1 Restoring the Windows Classic Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 21 21 21 21 22 23 25 25 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 31 31 31 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 36 37 38 42 44 45

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

3.10.1 Caring for the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.10.2 Cleaning the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Operating System

3.1

Operating System •

3.2

Microsoft® Windows® Embedded CE 6.0

Battery Details Omnii Hand-Held Computers are powered by a lithium-ion battery pack, Model ST3001. Please see the following sections for detailed battery information: • • • • •

3.2.1

Installation: “Preparing the Omnii for Operation” on page 14. Calibration and power settings: “Power Properties” on page 88. Chargers and docking stations: Chapter 5: “Accessories”. Specifications: “Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)” on page E-5. Contact pinout: “Omnii Battery Contacts” on page A-6.

Battery Safety Important: Before attempting to install, use, or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000191.

3.2.2

Battery Swap Time Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame. To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the “Flash Disk” partition of the file system. Refer to “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 89 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes. The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the Omnii will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the Omnii shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time. Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options: The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Psion battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold. See “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 89 for details. To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery. However, if you supply AC power to the Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.

3.2.3

Charging the Battery Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information on these accessories, please see Chapter 5: “Accessories”.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Keyboard

Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity. Table 3.1

Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times at 25°C (77°F)

% Charge Completed

During Sleep Mode

While Operating

100%

4 hrs.

8 hrs.

75%

2 hrs.

6 hrs.

Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).

3.3

The Keyboard The Omnii offers a wide variety of Alpha and Numeric keyboard layouts. See http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm for a list of available configurations. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, those differences are described in the following sections. The Omnii is equipped with either an [Enter/Power] key or Power button (55- and 66-key keyboards only) that allows you to switch the unit on and to shut down the unit to Suspend mode. For details refer to “Switching the Omnii On and Off” on page 15. There are a number of modifier keys that provide access to additional keys and system functions, as described in “Modifier Keys” on page 24. The [Blue/FN] modifier key provides access to additional keys and system functions. These functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys. Figure 3.1

Keyboard Layouts [SYM] Key

[SCAN] Key

[FN] Modifier Key

[Enter/Power] Key

[SHIFT] Modifier Key

[Windows] Key 36-Key Numeric 123 Keyboard

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

59-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Regular Keys

The Power Button (55-Key and 66-Key Keyboards only) The [Power] button in the upper right corner of the keyboard switches the unit on and off.

[Talk] key

Power button

[End] key

55-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard with phone

3.3.1

Regular Keys The [Enter] Key The [Enter] key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions, and on some units to also power the unit on and off (for details refer to “Switching the Omnii On and Off” on page 15). Note: 55-key and 66-key keyboards are equipped with a Power button. For these keyboards, the [Enter] key does not switch the unit on or off. The [SHIFT] Key The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and functions on the numeric keyboards. Press the [SHIFT] key to turn the shift state 'on' (it will be represented by an up arrow in the taskbar), then press another key to access the shifted function of that key. Press the [SHIFT] key twice to lock the shift state on (the up arrow in the taskbar will be underlined). Press [SHIFT] again to turn the shift state off. To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off. The Arrow Keys The [Arrow] keys are located near the top of the keyboard, and are represented on the keyboard as triangles pointing in different directions. The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down, left and right. The left arrow key should not be confused with the [BACKSPACE] key which is depicted as a left arrow. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear. The [BACKSPACE/DEL] Key The [BACKSPACE] key (represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the previous key stroke. The [DEL] key ([FN] +[BACKSPACE]) erases the character at the current cursor position. The [CTRL] and [ALT] Keys The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent. Pressing either key twice locks it 'on' (it appears underlined on the Taskbar). Pressing the key once again unlocks it.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Modifier Keys

The [TAB] Key Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward. The [ESC] Key Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box, or activity. The [SPACE] Key The [SPACE] key is represented on the keyboard by a long, low horizontal line contained by a small vertical line on each side. Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a check box. The [SCAN] Key The Omnii is equipped with a single [SCAN] key on the keyboard and an extra [SCAN] button located on the left side of the unit. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions.

3.3.2

Modifier Keys The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next key pressed. The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified. [SHIFT] and [FN] The [SHIFT] and [FN] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions. The functions related to these modifier keys are colour-coded in white and blue print respectively above the keyboard keys, dependant on your keyboard format. [SYM] Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (PN 8100016), note that the [SYM] key is interchangeable with the [ORANGE] key. The Symbol [SYM] modifier key is represented on the keyboard by the characters ‘SYM’ and provides access to commonly used symbolic characters. Pressing the key brings up the Symbol soft input panel (SIP) onscreen keyboard, with symbols mapped to each key. If you wish to adjust the settings for the pop-up screen (e.g. time of delay before screen appears, etc.), modify the file softinputpanel.xml, located in the Windows folder. Note: Modifier keys are remapped in Control Panel, and the Symbol SIP will automatically show and use the new mappings after the next reboot. The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your Omnii—either numeric or alphanumeric.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Function Keys and Macro Keys

Figure 3.2

Symbol Soft Input Panels Internet Browser Keys

[SPACE] Key

36-KEY Numeric Keyboard

3.3.2.1

59-KEY Alpha Keyboard

Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed, it is shown in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether a modifier key is active. For example, if the [CTRL] key is pressed, Ctrl is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.

3.3.2.2

Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in underlined letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [FN] key twice locks it on—it is displayed as an underlined blue ‘FN’ in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen. The same is true of the [SYM] key, which is shown as an underlined orange ‘SYM’ in the taskbar. The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked, the underline representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed. Note: The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a key once will lock the key ‘on’. If you disable the ‘One Shot’ function of the key, pressing it once will lock the key ‘on’. Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it ‘off’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 78 for details.

3.3.3

Function Keys and Macro Keys In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 22), the Omnii supports function keys and macro keys. All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application. The Open TekTerm application utilizes these keys (for detailed information, see the Open TekTerm Software User Manual, PN 8000073).

3.3.3.1

Function Keys Function keys perform special, custom-defined functions within an application. These keys are accessed by pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard, or through the appropriate [SHIFT] or [FN] key sequence, depending on the keyboard variant being used. Alphanumeric Keyboard Function Keys The Alphanumeric keyboards are equipped with up to thirty function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in blue print above the alpha keys or function keys (depending on your keyboard). To access the blue function keys, press the [FN] key followed by the appropriate alpha or function key.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys

Function keys [F1] through [F24] can be used with the Windows Embedded CE operating system or another application. The additional function keys, [F25] through [F30] along with the macros, are not used as part of the Windows Embedded CE operating system. Numeric Keyboard Function Keys The Numeric keyboards are equipped with up to 24 function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in white print above the function keys. Function keys F25 through F30 can only be accessed by remapping another key to that function. To access the white function keys, press the [SHIFT] key followed by the appropriate function key.

3.3.3.2

Macro Keys Important: Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 79 for details about creating macros. Several of the Omnii keyboards are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the [Enter/Power] key, the [BACKSPACE] key, any function key and arrow key, etc. 59-Key Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys These keyboards have six macro keys: [M1] to [M6], located on the S to X keys (second-last row of keys). To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key. 36-Key Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys These keyboards are equipped with five macro keys: [M1] to [M5]. These keys are colour coded in blue print above function keys [F1] to [F5]. To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key.

3.3.4

Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys On the Numeric Omnii keyboards, all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above the keys. Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the [FN] modifier key, then pressing another key on the keyboard. The Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboard has each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single [FN]shifted character on individual keys. An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character. The Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone-style alphabetic keys, with the blue alphabetic characters located in groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys. To access characters on these keyboards, a few extra steps are needed, as described below. Choosing a Single Alpha Character Note: The following examples assume that the [FN] key is enabled as ‘Lock’ mode in the ‘One Shot’ screen (accessible through the Control Panel Keyboard icon). In ‘Lock’ mode, pressing the [FN] key once locks it ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 78 for details. The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in blue characters above the numeric key [2]. The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar as you press the numeric key, providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen. To choose the letter ‘a’: • Press the [FN] key, and press the numeric key [2]. • Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off. To choose the letter ‘b’: • Press the [FN] key, and press [2] twice. • Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off. To choose the letter ‘c’:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Keypad Backlight

• •

Press the [FN] key, and press [2] three times. Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off. Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key. If you pause longer than one second between key presses, the alphabetic character that is displayed at that time will be entered.

Selecting Uppercase Letters To display a single capital letter, press the [SHIFT] key first, then the letter you want. To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off.

3.3.5

The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows Embedded CE Control Panel. The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box. Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 78 for details about this option. Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.

3.4

The Display The Omnii is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed.

3.4.1

Adjusting the Display Backlight The behaviour of the display backlight and the intensity of the backlight can be specified in the Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. Note: Refer to “Backlight” on page 68 for details about the Display Properties dialog box.

3.4.2

Calibrating the Touchscreen If your Omnii touchscreen has never been calibrated, or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control Panel to recalibrate the screen. •

In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.

•

Select the Calibration tab, and then choose the Recalibrate button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Indicators

•

3.5

Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.

Indicators The Omnii uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages, vibrations, and audio tones as indicators.

3.5.1

LEDs The Omnii is equipped with four coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these LEDs indicate. Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission. Figure 3.3

LED Status Indicators 1

1. Battery Charge Status 2. Operating System Status 3. Radio Status 4. Scanner Status

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii LEDs

3.5.1.1

Battery Charge Status LED The far left LED is reserved for battery charge status. This indicator is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily. Table 3.2

Battery Charge LED Behaviours Charge LED Behaviour

3.5.1.2

Function

OFF

External power not detected.

Solid Green

Battery charging complete.

Flashing Green

Charge in progress.

Yellow

Cell temperature out of range for charge.

Solid Red

Unable to charge battery.

Operating System Status LED The second LED indicates system notifications and operating system status. It is also available for userloaded custom Windows Embedded CE applications. Table 3.3 Operating LED Behaviour

3.5.1.3

Function

OFF when unit is in Suspend or Shutdown.

Normal operating status.

Solid Yellow

The unit is powering on.

Fast Flashing Yellow

The unit is entering Suspend mode.

Flashing Yellow

This LED is controlled by the Microsoft NLED api.

Radio Status LED The third LED from the left indicates that the GPS radio is enabled or that the WWAN radio is enabled. Table 3.4 Radio Traffic LED Behaviour

3.5.1.4

Function

OFF

The radio is disabled.

Slow Flashing Blue

The radio is enabled and active.

Scanner Status LED The fourth (far right) LED indicates scanner status. Table 3.5 Scan LED Behaviour

Function

OFF

The scanner is not in use.

Solid Red during scan

Scan in progress.

Solid Green after decode OFF when scan ended

Successful scan.

Flashing Red

Unsuccessful scan.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Onscreen Indicators

3.5.2

Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators, including the Input Panel button if you have chosen to show that option in the Taskbar and Start Menu settings. Figure 3.4

Taskbar

The taskbar changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your Omnii, the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar. Windows® Start Button If you are using the touchscreen, you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen, or press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu, and then tap on the desired application. Modifier Key Indicators [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar, for example, pressing the [FN] key once displays ‘FN’ in the taskbar. If a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is displayed with underlined letters in the taskbar, for example, pressing [FN] twice displays ‘FN’ in the taskbar. Power The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides quick access to the charge state of the battery. Tapping on the icon once will show the percentage charge left in the battery. Tapping on the icon twice opens the Power Properties menus (see “Power Properties” on page 88), where you can set the low battery warnings levels, and time to enter Suspend. If the Omnii is using external AC power, an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar. 802.11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.

Good Reception

Weak Reception

No Radio Link

WWAN Radio Signal Quality Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection. For details, see “Taskbar Icons” on page G-3.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Audio Indicators

Docking Device When a hand-held is inserted in a docking station, charger or cradle, an associated icon appears in the taskbar.

Combo Charger & Combo Docking Station

Quad Docking Station

Powered Vehicle Cradle, Desktop Dock & Snap Module

Bluetooth Radio This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio. Input Panel You can tap the Input Panel icon to activate the soft keyboard application.

3.5.3

Audio Indicators The Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and .wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver. The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low. The volume rocker button is located on the left side of the hand-held. Information on configuring sounds is detailed in “Volume & Sounds Properties” on page 122.

3.5.4

Vibrations You can set the Omnii to vibrate when a successful or unsuccessful barcode scan is performed. See “Scanners”, page 97.

3.6

Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card There are two slots available in the battery compartment—the lower slot is provided for a microSD (Secure Digital) card, which provides additional non-volatile memory to your Omnii, and the upper slot is for a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card, which allows access to the Voice option, access to the Internet, and so on.

microSD Card Slot

OPEN

SD Cover

3.6.1

LOCK

SIM Card Slot

Inserting the Cards • Switch off the power to the Omnii. • Remove the battery. • Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the SD cover screw. Flip the cover open or remove it. For a microSD card: •

Slide the microSD card door to the left to unlock it. Flip it open.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Scanners and Imagers

• •

Slide the microSD card into the guides on the SD card door. Close the microSD card door, and slide it to the right to lock it.

Micro

For a SIM card: • • •

Slide the SIM card metal door latch to the right to unlock it, then flip the door open. Slide the card into the guides on the SIM card door. Swing the hinged door back down into place, and slide the metal door latch to the left to lock it.

OPEN

LOCK

3.7

Scanners and Imagers Important: It is critical that you review the “Laser Warnings” in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) before using any of the scanners described in this chapter. For detailed scanner specifications and decode zone tables, refer to Appendix D: “Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” .

Note: To enable a newly-installed imager or scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Enter/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. If your unit has a [Power] button, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Power] button for a minimum of three seconds. The Omnii supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements. Refer to the following sections for detailed information: • • • •

Scanner list and specifications: Appendix D: “Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” . Configuration: “Scanners” on page 97 and “Manage Triggers” on page 84. “Scanning Techniques” on page 33 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan. “Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations” on page 33 details how to interpret whether or not a barcode has been successfully scanned. • Barcode Parameters: Appendix C: “Scanner Settings”. • Imager Settings: Appendix B: “Imager & Camera Settings”. • “Troubleshooting” on page 33 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail. Scanner types include: • • • •

Long Range: reads large 1D barcodes (55 mil) at long distances (up to 3m). Standard Range/High Performance: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m). Extended Range: reads regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at short to medium distances (1m), as well as large 1D barcodes (e.g. 55 mil) at long distances. 1D Imager: reads regular 1D and PDF417 barcodes at short to medium distances.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Basic Scanner Operations

•

3.7.1

Basic Scanner Operations • •

3.7.2

Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.

Scanning Techniques • • • • • • •

3.7.3

EA11 2D imager: reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes; smallest barcode at 5 mil with a minimum read distance to 2.8 in. / maximum read distance of 5.1 in.; largest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 3.1 in. / maximum distance of 32.4 in. EA20X 2D imager: reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes; shortest barcode at 6 mil with a minimum read distance of 6.1 inches / maximum read distance of 9.1 inches; longest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 5.1 inches / maximum read distance of 49.2 inches. SE4600LR imager: captures digital images for transmission to a decoder to decode a barcode of any format supported by the decoding software. Uses laser aiming, LED illumination, and CMOS sensors to capture barcode images over an extended range and under a wide variety of lighting conditions.

Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the barcode. Do not hold the scanner directly over the barcode. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode. Scan the entire barcode. If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner, make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the barcode, including the margins on either end of the symbol. If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within the barcode you want to scan. When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the barcode. Movement blurs the image. Hold the scanner farther away for larger barcodes. Hold the scanner closer for barcodes with bars that are close together.

Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations The scanner LED (the far right LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The LED behaves as follows: • Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour. • Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended. • Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red. A barcode icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable the “Scan Indicator” parameter in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu. When the scan is successful, the barcode data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol trigger) is released, but only if the “Scan Result” parameter is turned on in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu. You can also enable sounds and vibrations to indicate good and bad scans by enabling those options in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu.

3.7.4

Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working, investigate the following: • • • • •

Is the unit on? Check that the barcode symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the barcode. Check the barcode to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different barcode to verify that the problem is not with the barcode. Check that the barcode is within the proper range. Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the hand-held. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners

• •

3.7.5

Is the laser beam scanning across the barcode? Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.

Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners •

Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time (msec)” on page -5 for details. Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and high visibility internal scanners.

•

3.7.6

Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.

Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single barcode or multiple barcodes (at one time). It can find a barcode regardless of its orientation—that is, even a barcode printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand-held will be decoded successfully. Note: When scanning multiple barcodes, ensure that all of the desired barcodes are within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all barcodes are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded barcodes are passed to the application program. The application program then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing barcodes. When scanning a single barcode, ensure that only the desired barcode is within the field of view of the scanner. Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of barcodes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the barcodes, especially if the barcode is far from the hand-held. Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated barcodes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the barcode to the side or top, or angle the barcode so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner. Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the barcode in order to decode it. It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance. • •

Turn the hand-held computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained. • When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the field—either in the centre of the barcode you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple barcodes are to be scanned. The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the barcode is taken.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Windows Embedded CE 6.0

3.8

Windows Embedded CE 6.0

3.8.1

Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications Graphic user interfaces such as Windows Embedded CE for portable devices and desktop Windows (Windows Vista™, Windows 7, Windows 8, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every ‘point and click’ action. Windows Embedded CE supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference—the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping. In those applications that support it, you can also flick and pan your finger to scroll through screens.

3.8.1.1

Navigating Using a Touchscreen Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 27. The Omnii comes equipped with a stylus—a pointing tool that looks like a pen. The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen. You can also use gestures with your fingers. You can use two gestures: pan and flick. Use left or right flicks to quickly move between tabs of a multi-tab control panel, or to scroll long lists of options. Use panning by touching and dragging a page that has scrollbars. Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only a finger touch or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii. To choose an icon, open a file, launch an applet or open a folder: •

3.8.1.2

Double-tap on the appropriate icon.

Navigating Using the Keyboard If you would like to use keyed input to choose icons and to navigate dialog boxes, refer to Table 3.6 for a description of the navigation keys. Table 3.6

Keyboard Navigation Operation

Key or Key Combination

Switch between active applications

[ALT] [TAB]

Open task manager

[ALT] [ESC]

Move the cursor

Arrow keys

Open file, folder or icon

[Enter]

Exit & Save

[Enter]

Close/Exit & Do Not Save

[ESC]

Navigate Dialog Boxes

[TAB] To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB] To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialog box [CTRL] [TAB]

Select Radio Button/Press Button

[SPACE]

Go to Start Menu

[Windows]

Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the Omnii does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

3.8.2

The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop When the Omnii boots up, the default startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately. Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp.

Figure 3.5

Omnii Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

To access desktop icons: • Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch an application. On the keyboard: •

Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press [Enter] to launch the highlighted icon. Note: If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons, the desktop may not be selected. Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu, and select Desktop. Now the desktop will be “in focus” and the arrow keys will highlight the icons.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

3.8.2.1

The Taskbar

The Omnii is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a charger, cradle, docking station, or Snap Module, an associated icon is displayed. In addition, the taskbar displays the application(s) currently running on your unit. The taskbar also displays active modifier keys: [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [FN] and [SYM]. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed with underlined letters. For example, if you have set the [CTRL] key lock to “on” in the Keyboard menu and you press the key, it is displayed as an underlined ‘Ctrl’ in the taskbar. (For detailed information on modifier keys and keyboard options, see “The Keyboard” on page 22).

3.8.2.1.1 Using the Taskbar A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted. The tooltip provides the status of each icon. If you’re using the touchscreen: •

Tap and hold on an icon to display the icon's tooltip. Double-tap the icon to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon. For example, double-tap the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information. On the keyboard: • • • • •

Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu. Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu, and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the submenu. Choose System Tray in the sub-menu. Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more information. Press [Enter] to display the appropriate dialog box.

3.8.2.1.2 Customizing the Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require: • In the Start Menu, choose Settings, and then Taskbar. If you’re using the keyboard: • Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu. • Highlight the Settings option, highlight Taskbar in the sub-menu, and press [Enter]. The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

• Tap on the items you want to activate or deactivate. The check mark indicates active items. If you’re using the keyboard: •

3.8.2.2

Highlight the options you want to activate, and press the [SPACE] key to select them. A check mark indicates active items.

The Start Menu The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application. •

To display the menu, tap on the Start Menu.

Note: Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work.

If you’re using the keyboard: • Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press [Enter], or If the menu item has an underlined character: •

Type the underlined alpha character. For example, to display the Run dialog box, type the letter ‘r’.

3.8.2.2.1 Programs •

Choose Programs to display a sub-menu of options. The programs displayed will be those resident in the Windows\Programs folder of the computer.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

Figure 3.6

Program Sub-Menu

This sub-menu allows you to choose Command Prompt, Internet Explorer, installed applications (e.g., Microsoft WordPad), PsionVU Access, Remote Desktop Connection, Wi-Fi Config, or Windows Explorer. Demo This folder contains the Scanner Demo, Demo Signature and Demo Sound applications. Scanner Demo can be used to test how the hand-held reads barcodes. Demo Signature allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file. Demo Sound allows you to record and playback sound files. The ‘Sample Rate’ and the ‘Bits Per Sample’ are the rates at which the sound will be recorded. Sounds recorded at the higher sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality sound but will require more file storage space. Lower sample rates and/or bits per sample produces a smaller file, but the sound quality suffers. The record and play buttons operate the same as any recording device. The X icon deletes the sound and the diskette icon allows you to save your sound. Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive. Internet Explorer The Omnii is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows Embedded CE. You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings>Control Panel or by double-tapping on the desktop icon My Device and then, double-tapping on the Control Panel icon. Microsoft WordPad WordPad is a basic word processor used to create, edit, and print .rtf, .doc, and .txt files. PsionVU Access PsionVU Access allows you to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from the default Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU shell. Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine using the hand-held (Windows Embedded CE device). “Remote Desktop Connection” on page 97 provides a website with details about this option. Wi-Fi Config The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11a/b/g/n radio for one or more wireless network profiles.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

Windows Explorer The Windows Explorer installed on your Omnii is consistent with all Windows Embedded CE devices.

3.8.2.2.2 Shortcuts Figure 3.7

Shortcuts Sub-Menu

System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon. These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information. • Choose Shortcuts>System Tray. When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the dialog box attached to an icon: • •

Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon, for example, the Bluetooth icon. Press [Enter] to display the Bluetooth menus.

Cycle Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through active applications. To cycle through your active applications: • •

Choose Shortcuts>Cycle Tasks, or Press [ALT] [TAB].

Task Manager The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display the task manager window: • •

Tap on Shortcuts>Task Manager, or Press [ALT] [ESC].

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop

3.8.2.2.3 Settings The Settings sub-menu includes the following settings: Control Panel, Network and Dial-up Connections and Taskbar and Start Menu. Figure 3.8

Settings Sub-Menu

Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and the shell. If your Omnii is running with the Psion Open TekTerm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel. Network and Dial-Up Connections The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure the Omnii network interfaces or execute an existing configuration. Refer to “Connectivity” on page 17 for radio setup details. Taskbar and Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the taskbar, choosing which options will be displayed. Refer to “Customizing the Taskbar” on page 37 for additional details about this option.

3.8.2.2.4 Run Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The PsionVU Desktop Shell

3.8.2.2.5 Shutdown The Shutdown menu includes these options: Suspend, Warm Reset and Cold Reset.

Suspend The Suspend option suspends the Omnii immediately. This is equivalent to turning the hand-held off. Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the hand-held, leaving all saved files and registry settings intact. Any unsaved data is lost. Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets the hand-held. Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost; however, the registry settings are saved.

3.9

The PsionVU Desktop Shell The appearance and actions of the desktop can be changed by tapping on the PsionVU Shell icon on your desktop, which activates the PsionVU shell. Note: The Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The PsionVU Desktop Shell

Figure 3.9

Switch to PsionVU Shell

After resetting the Omnii, the desktop appearance will be very different. The programs are accessed with finger (or stylus) taps and swipes. If there are more applications than shown on one screen, a white animated dot will be present on the side of the screen in the direction of the next set of icons. Swiping the screen to that direction will move the display to the next screen. Note: Although the Desktop appearance defaults to the “Ingenuity” theme, the theme is not changed using the PsionVU Shell icon. To change themes, open the Shell Settings>Advanced menu in PsionVU Access (see “Shell Settings” on page 94).

Hold the stylus or your finger on the Active Tasks, Favourites, or Notifications Bar, and swipe to the left or right to switch to the next screen.

Active Tasks Bar

Favourites Bar

Notifications Bar

A different program, PsionVU Access, enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details see “PsionVU Access” on page 92. To change your Desktop background, refer to “Shell Settings” on page 94. Active Tasks Bar Open applications are shown in the top bar—the most recently opened is the first icon on the left. Tapping once on a program icon will maximize the application. This feature replaces the Task Manager of the Windows Classic Shell.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Restoring the Windows Classic Shell

Date/Time Bar Tapping once on the date or time will open the Date/Time Properties settings to enable you to change your settings and time zone. Favourites Bar The Favourites Bar replaces the Windows Classic Shell’s Desktop and Start Menu. These icons are the program shortcuts from your Windows>Start Menu. Tapping once will open the program. If you tap and hold on an icon, the application name is displayed. Notifications Bar This bar shows the run-time program notifications for Battery, Volume, Wi-Fi, Phone or GPRS, and other notifications for the programs you are running. This feature replaces the Taskbar of the Windows Classic Shell. Desktop Minimized View When an application is opened and maximized, the desktop view is minimized and the Notifications Bar is shown at the bottom of the screen. Tapping anywhere on the Notifications Bar (except on the SIP) will restore the PsionVU desktop. Note: In order to use the SIP, turn on the automatic settings in Control Panel>Input Panel.

PsionVU Access The PsionVU Access program allows you to open a different program, PsionVU, which enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details see “PsionVU Access” on page 92. To change your Desktop background, refer to “Shell Settings” on page 94. To open PsionVU: •

3.9.1

Tap on the PsionVU Access icon in the Favourites Bar.

Restoring the Windows Classic Shell The default Desktop appearance and actions can be restored by tapping on the PsionVU Shell icon in the Favourites Bar.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii General Maintenance

Figure 3.10 Shell Switch to Windows Classic Shell Desktop

Note: The Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells.

3.10

General Maintenance

3.10.1

Caring for the Touchscreen The touchscreen is covered with a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen: • mustard • ketchup • sodium hydroxide • concentrated caustic solutions • benzyl alcohol • concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (RV6105). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced. Do not to expose the touchscreen to direct sunlight for prolonged periods of time. If this is unavoidable, use a UV screen protector to extend the the life of the screen.

3.10.2

Cleaning the Omnii Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only your finger or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii. • •

• •

Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The Omnii has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions. Exposure to aircraft de-icing fluids can degrade the plastics on Omnii. If the Omnii is used near aircraft de-icing environments, regular rinsing with water is recommended. To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

CONFIGURATION

4.1

4.2 4.3 4.4

4.5 4.6 4.7

4.8

4.9

4.10 4.11

4.12 4.13 4.14

Overview of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Psion Software Advantage. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Microsoft Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Control Panel Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Paired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices . 4.4.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD). . 4.4.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2.4 Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection. . . . . Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . 4.7.2 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.3 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dr. Debug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.2 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.3 Motion Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings. . . . . . . . . 4.11.1 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.2 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.4 AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.5 Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imager & Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.1 Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.2 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51 51 51 51 52 55 56 57 58 58 58 59 59 61 61 62 62 65 66 67 67 67 67 68 68 68 68 70 70 70 71 71 72 72 72 73 73 74 75 75 76 77 77 78 78

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

4.15

4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20

4.21

4.22 4.23

4.24 4.25

4.26

4.27 4.28

4.14.4 Keyboard Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.6 Scancode Remapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.7 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open TekTerm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PartnerUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.1 Battery Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.2 Power Saving Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . 4.20.4 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.5 Built-in Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.6 Battery Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PsionVU Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.1 Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.2 Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.4 Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21.5 Import/Export to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.1 Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.1.1 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.2.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.2.3 Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.3 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.4 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.23.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) . Screen Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25.1 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25.2 Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.26.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28.1 Creating a Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28.2 Creating a Clone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 79 . 80 . 81 . 83 . 84 . 84 . 85 . 86 . 87 . 87 . 88 . 88 . 88 . 88 . 89 . 90 . 90 . 90 . 92 . 93 . 94 . 95 . 96 . 96 . 97 . 97 . 98 . 98 . 98 . 99 100 100 . 101 . 101 .103 .103 .103 .105 .105 .105 .106 .107 .109 .109 .109 . 110 . 110 . 111 . 111 . 112

4.29

4.30

4.31

4.32

4.33

4.28.3 Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28.3.1 Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28.3.2 Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TweakIt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29.1 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings . . . . . . . 4.29.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings. 4.29.1.3 Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . 4.29.2 Registry Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30.1 Dialing a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30.2 Receiving an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30.3 Voice Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30.4 File Menu – Phonebook Management . . . . . . . . . Volume & Sounds Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.31.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wi-Fi Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.1 Manually Creating a Network . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.2 Authentication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.3 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.4 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.5 Verify Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.6 Enable OPMK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.2.7 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . 4.32.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.3.1 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.3.2 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32.5 Monitoring the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . WiFi Connect A.R.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 113 . 113 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 115 . 115 . 116 . 116 . 117 . 117 . 118 . 118 . 119 . 121 . 122 . 122 . 123 . 123 . 123 . 124 . 124 . 125 . 126 . 126 . 127 . 127 . 127 . 128 . 128 . 129 .130 . 131 . 131

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Overview of Software

4.1

Overview of Software The Omnii programs and applications are accessed through two main areas from the Desktop Start Menu: Programs and Settings>Control Panel. This chapter details the configuration for the major software from both areas, listed alphabetically.

4.1.1

Psion Software Advantage Psion Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system administrators and end users. These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maximize productivity. AGPS App Launch Keys Battery Health Bluetooth Manager Compass Dr. Debug PartnerUp

4.1.2

WiFiConnect A.R.C. PsionVu TweakIt Scanner Total Recall Manage Triggers WiFi Config

Microsoft Software Windows CE 6.0 R3 is a 32-bit, real-time, multitasking Operating System. The OS features a small footprint, with compatibility to port existing Win32 applications and Touch & Gesture support. Some of the major Windows CE 6.0 R3 components are: Control Panel, where both Psion Advantage and Microsoft applications are listed Flash Lite Internet Explorer Embedded Microsoft WordPad Remote Desktop Connection Windows Explorer

4.2

The Control Panel The Windows Embedded CE Control Panel provides a group of applications through which you can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as power, keyboard sensitivity, network configuration, system backup, desktop appearance, and so on. When the Omnii boots up, the startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately. To access the Control Panel: • Press the [Windows icon] to display the Start Menu. • Tap on Settings>Control Panel. If you’re using the keyboard: • Press the [Windows icon] to display the Start Menu. • Highlight Settings in Start Menu, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to highlight the Control Panel. • Press the [Enter] key. The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your Omnii.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Applications

Figure 4.1

4.2.1

Control Panel Icons

Control Panel Applications The Control Panel provides a group of applications that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your Omnii. This section shows the related icons in the Control Panel and gives a brief description of each. App Launch Keys By mapping keys to applications using this program, you can then launch those applications from a single key-press. Bluetooth Opens the Bluetooth Manager which provides options for configuring various Bluetooth peripherals. It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices and provide network access. Certificates This program provides access to the Certificates Manager and Stores. The Certificates Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificates Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certificates. “Compass” on page 66 directs you to the appropriate setup information. Compass The internal compass can be calibrated to indicate in which direction the unit is pointed. Date/Time Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time, and Time Zone on your unit. Dialing Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns—for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialog box. Display Changes the display backlight and the appearance (colour scheme) on the unit desktop. Dr. Debug Provides both error diagnostic and troubleshooting tools. Error Reporting Allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Applications

GPS Settings Allows you to enable and configure GPS operation. Imagers The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings. This icon is only present when the appropriate imager is installed. For detailed information, see Appendix B: “Imager & Camera Settings”. Input Panel Provides the framework for a Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) should you need to design your own SIP, or change some soft keyboard options. Internet Options Provides options to configure your Internet browser. You can determine items such as the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, the cache size, the Internet connection options, and the security level that is applied when browsing. Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity, and many other functions. Manage Triggers This utility allows you to define buttons as triggers for different devices. For example you would use this utility to configure a button for the scanner, RFID reader, and camera. Microphone Enables you to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held. Network and Dial-up Connections Displays network interfaces and allows new dial-up and VPN interfaces to be created. It also allows Windows configuration of the interface. Refer to “Connectivity” on page 17 for details. Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. Network ID tab information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided by your System Administrator.) PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. By tapping on an application in the list, you are taken to the associated web site and allowed to install the application. Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place. PC Connection Enables direct connection to a desktop computer (or through ActiveSync—see “Data Transfer” on page 17). Selecting the Change Connection button allows you to change the type of direct connection to your PC. Power Displays battery pack power status. (Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the taskbar.) Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states and specify a suspend threshold. PsionVU PsionVU enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With PsionVU and PsionVU Shell (see “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42) you can customize the entire look and feel of your User Experience. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Applications

Quick Defrost The optional Heater Control feature for the OmniiXT15f freezer models is used in cold environments to prevent condensation from developing on or inside the Omnii. Refer to Appendix F: “Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants” for detailed information. Region and Language Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand-held screen along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region. Remove Programs Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and then click on the Remove button. Scanners Provides scanner parameters and the barcode symbologies that the Omnii barcode scanner will successfully read. Screen Rotation This feature enables you to change screen orientation into either landscape, portrait, or both modes. Storage Manager Allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present, such as SD-MMC flash cards. For details, see page 105. Stylus Adjusts how Windows Embedded CE recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps). In the Calibration tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the screen. System You can display the system and memory properties, as well as create your device name. In the Memory tab, you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory. System Properties Identifies the computer’s software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled. Total Recall Provides access to a backup/restore and deployment utility to maintain applications and settings over cold reboots and for multiple devices. TweakIt Allows you to change Advanced System Settings (interface, network, and servers), User System Settings (display font size), and provides the Registry Editor. Volume & Sounds Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings, key clicks, and screen taps. You can also configure system (Windows) sounds and .wav files. Wireless WAN Provides access to technology like GSM/GPRS, which allows wide area networking capability such as internet browsing via GSM/GPRS. It also provides access to the Phone API. For detailed information, see Appendix G: “Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings”.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration App Launch Keys

4.3

App Launch Keys The App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key-press. •

In the Control Panel, choose the App Launch Keys icon.

To assign an application key: •

Tap the Add button.

•

Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.) The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse through the information in your Omnii until you locate the application you want to launch.

• Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK. The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to need to define command line parameters for your application. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the WordPad application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the WordPad application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field. •

Tap on OK.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Bluetooth® Setup

• •

4.4

If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this final screen. Otherwise, tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key. To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.

Bluetooth® Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a 10 metre (32 ft.) range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate. It is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on. Psion provides built-in support for: • GSM/GPRS universal handset • Bluetooth printer • Bluetooth headset Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although the Omnii includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously—this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11 network, Psion recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners). Bluetooth peripherals are configured by choosing the Bluetooth icon in the Control Panel. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the Omnii host. Note: The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna.

•

In the Control Panel, choose the Bluetooth icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen.

The Bluetooth Manager allows users to search, pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices within their personal area network. The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default. Before you begin the setup process: • Tap on the Mode tab, and tap in the check box next to Turn on Bluetooth. Tap on OK. When the radio is enabled, a Bluetooth icon appears on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It is ready for setup.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Paired

4.4.1

Paired This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is :. Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service.

To learn how to scan for devices to pair, review “Device” on page 58. Note: If a service is actively paired and connected, the device and its services are displayed in bold typeface in this list. •

Tap on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop-up menu.

The displayed menu depends on the type of the service chosen. Query Services and Remove Commands • Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen. • Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab. OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands The OPP defines two roles—a Push Server and a Push Client. Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server. Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server. OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option: •

Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected. When the transmission begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission.

HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands The HSP (Headset Profile) allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices. HSP/HFP services provide the following unique menu options: •

Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Device

• •

4.4.2

Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset. Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted.

Device In this tab, users can discover and display Bluetooth devices.

4.4.2.1

Discovering and Removing Devices Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of the Omnii and lists them in this tab. Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed. Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services. Note: To limit the number of devices listed to a particular type of device, refer to “Filtering By Class of Device (COD)”, next section.

4.4.2.2

Filtering By Class of Device (COD)

This menu allows you to filter the displayed devices by their COD. If, for example, you choose Computer from this menu, only the devices that have the matching Computer COD value will be displayed. Choosing All lists all detected devices.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Device

4.4.2.3

Device Pop-up Menu

The Device pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a device from the list. Pair begins the pairing process by querying the services and profiles of the discovered device. An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired. Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry, updating the name. This command is useful if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed remotely. Delete removes this device from the list.

4.4.2.4

Pairing a Device To pair devices: • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode. • Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area. • When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair. • In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair. An Authentication dialog box is displayed.

• If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box. • To proceed without authentication, tap on Next. After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Device

• Click in the check box to the left of the service to activate it. • Click on Done. Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box. Serial Profile is an example.

This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting four different Modes: Serial, ActiveSync, Scanner, and Printer Port. Serial is used for simple serial port communication. ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth. Scanner is used to create a connection to a barcode scanner. A serial connection is created, then the Scanner Services is notified of the connection so that the incoming barcode scan will be forwarded to Scanner Services directly. Printer Port must be chosen here if you want to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer. For further details, see “Mode” on page 61. •

Once you’ve completed the information, tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Servers

4.4.3

Servers

When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to the Omnii, the remote device is considered the ‘Bluetooth master’ and the hand-held, the ‘Bluetooth slave’. In order for the remote device to connect to the hand-held, the Omnii must offer a service in the form of a server. The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three server services available: Serial, Scanner and OBEX OPP. Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the drop-down menu. You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop-down menu. BSP (Bluetooth Serial Port) was created by Microsoft to allow Bluetooth to have its own serial prefix in order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used. Note: Even after a Serial Port Profile server is created, an application must open the created port before a remote device can connect. Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service (SCS). This is used for Bluetooth barcode scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input. OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed on the Omnii after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device. •

4.4.4

Tap on the check box to activate the server.

Mode

Turn on Bluetooth activates the Bluetooth radio. Discoverable determines whether the Omnii is visible or invisible to other devices.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration About

Printer Port allows you to assign and enable a virtual outgoing COM port selected from the drop-down menu to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer. Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, the printer must be on and connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect. • • • •

Select a port within the Printer Port drop-down list, e.g. BSP1: Check the Printer Port check box. Open the Device tab and tap on Scan. Tap-and-hold each Bluetooth Printer device entry and then select Pair, key-in the Passcode (if needed) and then tap Done. DO NOT select any services! • Close the Bluetooth Manager. • Select the Bluetooth device to print to—you will need to key-in (or programmatically raise) the following key sequence [CTRL] [ALT] [F1]. • You can now select the Bluetooth device to which you wish to print. Allow Bluetooth to wake system allows remote Bluetooth devices to wake the Omnii by requesting a Bluetooth service that requires host intervention. This feature can also be used when the Omnii is waking from suspend to significantly to reduce the initialization time of the Bluetooth system.

4.4.5

About

Device Name displays the broadcasted name of the hand-held. The name can be changed in the System Properties applet: Start>Settings>Control Panel>System icon>Device Name tab. Local Address displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the Bluetooth chip. HCI Version & LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware. Component indicates the version of the Psion Bluetooth Subsystem (the manager, drivers, etc). Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific Omnii.

4.4.6

The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection The following steps describe how to set up an Internet data connection using a GSM cellular telephone with Bluetooth. The Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone, which then accesses a WAN (Wide Area Network) and transfers data using GPRS. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Enable the Dial-Up Networking service in the cell phone. Make the phone discoverable. Pair the phone service with the Omnii Dial-Up Networking service using the Bluetooth Manager. (For instructions on pairing devices, refer to “Pairing a Device” on page 59.) To set up the Internet parameters, choose the Network And Dial-up Connections icon from the Control Panel.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection

Tap on Make New Connection.

In the Make New Connection dialog box, choose Dial-Up Connection. Enter a name for your GPRS network connection.

Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box.

In the drop-down menu labelled Select a modem, choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box. The Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth equipped cellular telephone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box. Omnii then disconnects.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection

Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected within, and press [Enter] to save your changes.

10. In the Modem dialog box, choose the Next button to display the Phone Number dialog box.

11.

The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve specified all the necessary information, choose the Finish button. In the Control Panel, choose the Dialing icon.

12. The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Certificates

Once you’ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press [Enter] to save your changes. 13. At this point, return to the Control Panel, and choose the Network and Dial-up Connections icon. 14. In the network connection window, the new network configuration—in this case, New Connection is displayed. Tap on the new icon.

When you tap on your new connection, an onscreen message indicates the status of your connection: connected, disconnected, error messages, and so on.

4.5

Certificates This program provides access to the Certificate Manager and Stores. The Certificate Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificate Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certificates. Omnii checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the Omnii explicitly trusts. This option is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance Omnii security. •

In the Control Panel, choose the Certificates icon.

Your Omnii has certificates preinstalled in the computer. My Certificates is the repository for the device’s personal certificate store, Other Authorities is the repository for the intermediate certificate store, and Trusted Authorities is the repository for the Trusted Root certificate store.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Compass

You can import or remove certificates, and view certificate information for any listing, including names, dates, serial numbers, etc. For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side devices (Omnii HandHeld Computers), refer to the following website: http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/windowsserver/dd448615.aspx

4.6

Compass Like all compasses, the Omnii digital compass indicates the direction in which the unit is pointed. If you find that the compass is inaccurate, you may need to calibrate it. •

In the Control Panel, choose the Compass icon.

•

Tap on the Calibrate button and follow the directions to calibrate the compass. Make certain that you perform the figure ‘8’ indicated in the instructions in a fairly wide loop to better ensure successful calibration.

When the compass recalibration is complete, a message appears on the Omnii screen indicating successful calibration. Note: The accuracy of the digital compass is affected by the following: a) close proximity to large magnets or metal structures, and b) internal scanner/imager activation.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC

4.7

Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft® ActiveSync® connectivity software can be used to connect your Omnii to PCs. If the Windows Vista® , Windows 7 or later, operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your Omnii and your PC. By using a Snap Module or Desktop Docking Station with your Omnii, you can connect to a PC with a cable to : • • •

4.7.1

View Omnii files from Windows Explorer. Drag and drop files between the Omnii and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives. Back up Omnii files to the PC, restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, etc.

Uploading Data in a Docking Station The Desktop Docking Stations allow your hand-held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available. When the Omnii is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the unit screen. For detailed information, refer to “Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003” on page 142.

4.7.2

Using Microsoft ActiveSync Note: If you use a serial port to connect devices like the Omnii to your desktop computer, the connection may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at non-default baud rates. To work around this problem, set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to use the same baud rate as the device. You can set the baud rate by editing the registry on the desktop host computer, as detailed in the steps outlined at the following website: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324466 To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s setup wizard. For details, go to the following website and type the name into the search box: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx

4.7.3

Using Windows Mobile Device Center If you are running Windows Vista, Windows 7, or later, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync. Instead, you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center. For instructions, go to the following website and type the name into the search box: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held: • •

Tap on Start>Computer to display the drives. The Omnii will be visible here. Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Display Properties

4.8

Display Properties •

4.8.1

Background •

4.8.2

In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Background tab. This dialog box allows you to customize your background image.

Appearance •

4.8.3

In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon.

In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Appearance tab. This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.

Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time. The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the backlight remains on when the unit is not in use (no key press, scanner trigger, etc.). Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.

•

In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Backlight

Note: Backlight changes take effect immediately. You do not need to reset the unit. To maximize battery run time, keep the display backlight brightness and active durations as low as possible. Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity. Bright For The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action (keypress, scan trigger). Dim For The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) after expiration of the Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place (such as a keypress or scan trigger). At the expiration of the Dim For duration, the display backlight shuts off. External Power Check Box When you select the check box next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON, the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when the Omnii is operating with external power (not battery power). If the Omnii is drawing power from its battery, this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box take effect.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Dr. Debug

4.9

Dr. Debug Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic and troubleshooting tool. •

4.9.1

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Dr. Debug icon.

Status

This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the debug engines. Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review. The logs should be used as reference when working with Psion Technical Support personnel.

4.9.2

Utilities The Utilities tab can be used to log network traffic. When you tap on the Start button, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion technician for evaluation.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Motion Meter

The Utilities tab can also be used to log heater control logic board information.

4.9.3

Motion Meter

Tapping on the Start button enables the Motion Meter feature. Once enabled, this applet records the number of impacts the Omnii has sustained, the distance of the fall in meters, the duration in 10ths of a second, and the date and time that the event occurred. The top 40 events are logged in a non-volatile location and can be used for diagnostic purposes by Psion or the site administrator.

4.9.4

Settings

• •

Choose an Error Level from the drop-down menu. To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the right of the Log Folder option. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Error Reporting

4.10

Error Reporting Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts. •

4.11

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Error Reporting icon to access your options.

GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the GPS module is powered and operating, and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem. You can also set up the AGPS Manager (an assisted GPS utility). •

4.11.1

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>GPS Settings icon.

Power This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The GPS Power drop-down menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off. • • •

Off – the GPS module is left off, always. Always on – the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the hand-held (suspend). On, and off in suspend – the GPS module is powered on, but if the Omnii is in suspend mode, the GPS module is turned off.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Profiles

4.11.2

Profiles

Tapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile: Default, Automotive or Pedestrian. • •

•

4.11.3

Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses. Automotive profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as the vehicle moves. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted, it will attempt to predict the vehicle position. Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module will not attempt to predict the operator’s movement.

Programs Tap on the GPS Program Port drop-down menu to choose the communication (COM) port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration AGPS

4.11.4

AGPS

To determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas, outdoors for example. However, if you’re attempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building, the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix. AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor coverage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (orbital) data to the Omnii periodically through Wi-Fi or WWAN. The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix. Update • Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris (EE) files from a secure host on the Internet using any interface that has an Internet connection. These files contain several days worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be used if the satellite’s broadcast ephemeris is not available. The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download, and once successfully downloaded, the Status field will read Idle. Settings • Click on the Settings button to define the AGPS server connection settings.

The AGPS server connection settings drop-down menu allows you to choose from two settings: Use default settings and Use custom settings. The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside from the Update field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your Omnii, the field values cannot be edited. The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an intranet rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Psion personnel. They will be able to help you configure your Psion devices and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Info

4.11.5

Info

This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version, the date on which files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is required, you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to Psion support staff.

4.12

Imager & Camera Settings The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager and camera settings. The principle uses of the applet are to decode barcodes and to capture images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to “Demo” on page 39 for details. Refer to Appendix B: “Imager & Camera Settings” for configuration details. To launch this applet: •

In the Control Panel, choose the Imagers icon.

Note: This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed. To enable a newly-installed imager, Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Enter/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Input Panel

4.13

Input Panel The Omnii is equipped with a Soft Input Panel (SIP). Shown below is the standard Microsoft SIP, accessed from the Control Panel.

Soft Keyboard

Input Panel Button Icon

Tapping on the Input Panel button displays a soft input panel (soft keyboard) that can be customized using the Input Panel dialog box. Important: If the Input Panel button icon is not visible in the taskbar, from the ‘Start’ menu, tap on Settings>Taskbar and Start Menu. Tap the check box next to ‘Show Input Panel Button’. To remove this icon from the taskbar, tap in the check box to erase the check mark. The soft keyboard operates just like a standard keyboard except that rather than pressing a key, you tap on letters, numbers, modifier keys, etc. on the Omnii screen. To customize the appearance and behaviour of the soft keyboard: Tap on the Input Panel icon in the Control Panel. Figure 4.2

•

Input Panel Properties

Tap on the Options button to change the appearance of your soft keyboard.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties

Note: You can also display this dialog box by double-tapping on the Input icon in the far-right corner of the taskbar.

Figure 4.3

4.14

Soft Keyboard Options

Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the [FN] and [SYM] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters. •

4.14.1

In the Control Panel, choose the Keyboard icon.

Key Repeat Note: These settings apply when a key is held down continuously.

•

In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Repeat tab.

Repeat Delay The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats, and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Backlight

Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate. Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you’ve chosen.

4.14.2

Keyboard Backlight •

In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.

Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity. Note: The keypad backlight maximum brightness will decrease over time as it ages. Use mid-range intensity settings when possible to extend the backlight lifespan. When the backlight starts to dim, use this parameter to make it brighter. ON For The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on after the last user action (keypress or scan trigger). Note: Tapping in the check box next to ‘When using external power, keep the backlight always ON’ forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power.

4.14.3

Keyboard One Shot Modes •

In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the One Shots tab.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys

The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Omnii behave. For each modifier key—[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN], and [SYM]—you have the following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock. Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on. For example, if the [FN] key is locked ‘on’, the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays it underlined. If this key is displayed without the underline in the taskbar, you’ll know that the key is not locked. It will become inactive following a key press.

Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection. Lock If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off. OneShot If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed. OneShot/Lock OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed. If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.

4.14.4

Keyboard Macro Keys •

In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Macros tab.

A macro has 200 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [Enter], [BACKSPACE] and [DEL] ([FN]-[BACKSPACE]), function keys and arrow keys. Recording and Saving a Macro You can program up to 6 physical macro keys, depending on your keyboard layout. You can also increase the number of virtual macro keys up to 15 using Scancode Remapping (for details, see “Scancode Remapping” on page 81). •

In the Macro menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1, to assign a macro to macro key [M1]. Choose the Record button. A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Unicode Mapping

•

Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro. • When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key sequence: [CTRL] [ALT] [Enter], or choose the Stop Recording button. A new screen ‘Verify Macro’ displays the macro sequence you created. The Save button is highlighted. •

Press [Enter] to save your macro, or highlight CANCEL and press [Enter] to discard it.

Executing a Macro To execute a macro: •

Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro.

Deleting a Macro To delete a macro: • •

4.14.5

In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete. Choose the Delete button.

Unicode Mapping •

In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Unicode Mapping tab.

The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For ex-

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Scancode Remapping

ample, the sample screen above shows “a (U+0061)” indicating that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values. All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value. Adding and Changing Unicode Values Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialog box. •

Choose the Add/Change button.

•

Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list. In the sample screen above, a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0). Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key.

•

Note: To add a shifted state, [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], press [TAB] to position the cursor in the check box next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. Press [SPACE] to select the shift state you want to assign. Removing Unicode Values • In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and choose the Remove button.

4.14.6

Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [Enter] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume, etc.) or run a macro. There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the FN table and the SYM table. Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (PN 8100016), note that the [ORANGE] key is interchangeable with the [SYM] key. Similarly, in the context of the scancode mapping tables, ‘Orange’ is interchangeable with ‘SYM’. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the FN table defines key presses that occur when the [FN] modifier is on; the SYM table defines key presses that occur when the [SYM] modifier is on. The default

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Scancode Remapping

mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box.

The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’. If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2). Adding a Remap To add a new remapping: • Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box. The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.

•

Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode. Note: The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.

Virtual Key, Function and Macro The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro. When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Lock Sequence

When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box. When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box. • •

Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro. Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box, and tap on OK.

Editing a Scancode Remap To edit a scancode: • • •

In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit. Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes. Tap on OK to save your changes.

Removing a Remap To delete a remap: • •

4.14.7

In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. Tap on OK.

Lock Sequence The Lock Sequence menu allows you to lock the Omnii keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.

• • •

To lock the keyboard, tap in the check box next to Enable key lock sequence. Tap in the check box next to Keyboard locked at startup. In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you will need to type to unlock the keyboard.

Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone attempting to use the keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen. A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Manage Triggers

Locked Keyboard Icon

•

4.15

Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.

Manage Triggers Allows users to configure how barcode scanners and other devices such as RFID readers are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.

4.15.1

•

In the Control Panel, choose the Manage Triggers icon.

•

In the Manage Triggers screen you’ll see a list of trigger mappings.

Trigger Mappings A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the module(s)—sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)”—of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, the external trigger (scan button) is software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the owner (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Add and Edit Trigger Mapping

Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings—for example [F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice—even if the trigger type is different. A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data, or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to applications. Double-Click When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between 0 to 1000 msec), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger-Press Type” on page 86. Show All Modules By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this check box, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed. Add Tapping this button brings up the Add Mapping dialog (see page 85), so that you can add new trigger mappings. Edit Tapping this button brings up the Edit Mapping dialog (see page 85), so that you can edit existing trigger mappings. Remove Tapping this button removes an existing mapping. OK The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the cancel button X is tapped instead, or the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will be discarded.

4.15.2

Add and Edit Trigger Mapping These dialogs allow you to add and edit trigger mappings.

Trigger Key This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Soft Scan, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Microphone

Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers)—for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers. It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer)—for example, two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID File System. Add Key Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.

Trigger-Press Type You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to the “owner”—that is, the application receiving the trigger press information—followed by a “trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will have occurred. If a mapping with the type Up/Down has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events. Module Trigger This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses. Show All Modules By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this check box, all owners, both active and inactive, are displayed.

4.16

Microphone •

In the Control Panel, choose the Microphone icon. Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Open TekTerm

• Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain. • Slide the microphone tab to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain. Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone you’ve chosen to the default gain. Tapping on Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain.

4.17

Open TekTerm Open TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. The Omnii includes unique features that support Open TekTerm, a Psion application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers. For detailed information, please refer to the Open TekTerm Software User Manual, PN 8000073.

4.18

PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associated web site. The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Representative from the Psion contact web page. www.psion.com/us/about/contact_psion-offices.htm

Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Psion.

Tapping on a preloaded client in this screen displays a drop-down menu from which the operator can choose from an array of related options. In the example following, Stay-Linked Documentation was chosen.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Pocket PC Compatibility

4.19

Pocket PC Compatibility The Omnii supports the AYGShell API set that allows Pocket PC-compatible applications to run on the handheld. Windows Embedded CE includes application programming interface (API) compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in units running Windows Embedded CE. The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002-based applications and Windows Embedded CE based devices: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/enus/dncenet/html/WINCENET_CEPCC_App.asp

4.20

Power Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit’s battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use. •

4.20.1

Battery Capacity •

4.20.2

In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon.

In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery tab to view battery details.

Power Saving Suspend •

In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Suspend tab.

Power Source This drop-down menu allows you to specify whether the unit is using AC Power or Battery Power.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup

Suspend Timeout Important: Psion recommends setting the Suspend value to 3 minutes. To further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time that the display backlight is ‘on’ (see “Backlight” on page 68). When the Omnii is idle—not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and so on) or system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on)—the hand-held uses the value assigned in the Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep (appear to be off). When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity, the unit enters suspend state. In suspend state, the Omnii CPU enters a sleep state, and wireless communication is shut off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing [Enter] wakes the system from suspend state.

4.20.3

Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup

The Suspend Threshold adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery drains. If you choose Maximum Operating Time, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the hand-held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time. Important: Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20% of the battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system RAM memory is lost and the unit must cold boot. In most real-time transaction environments this is not a problem (it only takes a few seconds to cold boot). Batch transaction environments, where data is not saved to a non-volatile memory (such as an SD FLASH card), may need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion does not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM. The Omnii Windows Embedded CE 6.0 environment does not store any critical data in RAM (such as the registry or file system). If your application does not save data to RAM, Psion recommends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to maximize battery run time. The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand-held. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold menu, the Omnii shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the computer. Once the Omnii shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle. • •

Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours. Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes; this increases the Omnii operating time—the amount of time the unit will operate before shutting down—but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Advanced

Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the computer while the battery is swapped for a fully charged one. Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data stored on the Omnii for approximately 4 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses.

4.20.4

Advanced •

In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Advanced tab.

Allow Suspend With This menu allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend Mode while it is operating with an active PPP connection, network interface or active TCP/IP connection. Low Power Warnings The sliding scale at the bottom of this menu allows you to specify the remaining battery capacity at which a warning message is displayed on the Omnii screen, from 0% to 20%.

4.20.5

Built-in Devices •

In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Built-in Devices tab.

WWAN Power Mode This menu allows you to enable power to your WWAN radio, and whether or not the radio will turn off when the Omnii enters Suspend Mode. To configure the radio, please refer to Appendix G: “Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings”.

4.20.6

Battery Health The Battery Health service provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measurements, beyond just capacity.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Battery Health

Important: Battery Health is an estimate and should not be depended on to provide a 100% account of battery condition. •

In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery Health tab.

Current Battery Health Meter The Current Battery Health Meter default values are shown here as ***** (Excellent), *** (Used), and * (Battery should be replaced). If you tap on the battery icon in the taskbar, a pop-up screen will show the state of the battery. The image below shows the default Excellent status screen.

Enable Battery Health Service This option allows you to enable the service. To access the menus after enabling the service, you will need to either wait until a resume from Suspend or restart the Omnii. Wakeup Device on Battery Insert When this option is enabled, whenever the battery is replaced the Omnii is powered up from Suspend and the current health of the battery is displayed. Add Health Colour to the Taskbar Battery Tray Icon Enabling this option changes the background colour for the battery icon in the Taskbar, based on battery condition: Green (excellent), Yellow (used), and Red (battery should be replaced). Show Popup UI on Device-Resume You can decide when the battery status pop-up user interface (UI) will appear, for how many seconds, and whether the battery cycle count is displayed (off by default). Edit – Changing Ratings Text You can customize the ratings text with the Edit option. By enclosing your text within the html tag used for Bold (or removing the tag to unbold the text), you can change the text that will appear in the pop-up battery status screen. For example, the default text “Excellent” can be changed to: “Battery is excellent, and will last one day shift.”...

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration PsionVU Access

4.21

PsionVU Access PsionVU Access enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU Shell either in the PsionVU Access settings (see “Other Shell Themes” on page 95) or by tapping on the Desktop icon PsionVU Shell (see “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42). •

In the Control Panel, choose the PsionVU icon.

When opening the PsionVU application, the PsionVU Access dialog will come up that enables you to either proceed to the PsionVU Settings menus, or change from you current Access mode to the other (Administrator or User). The computer must be reset following a change, and a confirmation will appear to enable you to continue or dismiss the change.

When opening the PsionVu Settings option, the following menus will be available:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Administrator Password

Figure 4.4

4.21.1

PsionVU Settings

Administrator Password By setting an Administrator Password, you can limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. The default security setting allows User access to all options, therefore restrictions and settings can be configured without setting a password. Note: If a setting or restriction is configured without setting an Administrator password, the following message is displayed: “!Administrator password is currently not set.” Once a password has been set, the message will disappear.

When an administrator password is set, the restricted options are accessed using a key combination. If a password has been set, the user would be prompted for the password. The option Show Password changes the displayed password from hidden (***) to readable.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Shell Settings

4.21.2

Shell Settings The Shell Settings application has two menus: Applications and Advanced. Applications

The Applications menu lists all the applications installed on the computer, alphabetically. The items checked in this view are shown on the Desktop. The Add and Edit buttons allow you to search for and add an application to the list of items in the selection window. You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the Add option will be greyed out and the following message is displayed: “!Maximum 18 entries reached.” When you select an application and tap on Edit, you will see fields for Command, Parameters, and Display Name. • Command: The Command field is prefilled with the path and name of the executable (.exe) or corresponding link (.lnk). If the selected file can’t be found (e.g. external memory card has been removed, files have been deleted), a message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: “These files cannot be found.” • Parameters: The Parameters option provides the option of adding extra parameters to the application (for .exe files only, not .lnk). For example, if the Command field is running “pword.exe” (Microsoft WordPad), the Parameters field could specify a document to open. • Display name: This is an editable field which is prefilled with the name of the application. Advanced The Applications menu allows you to enable or disable some device functions. Windows Classic Shell

The following options can be enabled or disabled in the Windows Classic Shell Desktop theme: • Start Menu Bar: If disabled, access to both Start Menu and Notifications are disabled. The Notification tooltips will still display. Any changes made will occur after a device reset.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Restrictions

• Start Button: If disabled, access to the Start Button and Notifications are disabled. The Notification tooltips will still display. Note: If “Disable access to the Start Button” is selected, but the “PsionVU Access by Key Sequence” remains unchecked, you will see the following status-message “!A Key Sequence is required when the Start Button is disabled.”, the check box will be auto-checked, and the focus will be set to the key-sequence selection. • Notifications: If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display. • Administrator Access in Start Menu: When this box is checked, the PsionVU Access program will be shown in the Start Menu>Programs list. The following item is not optional: • Administrator Key Sequence: Sets the key sequence to open PsionVU Access. Other Shell Themes

The following options can be enabled or disabled in the PsionVU Shell Desktop themes (shown in the dropdown list as Windows Classic Shell, Clear_Run, Ingenuity, Active_Glow, and Flip_Side_Blue): Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to one of the PsionVU themes shown here—but by tapping on the Desktop icon PsionVU Shell (see “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 42), the “Ingenuity” theme is automatically loaded. The computer must be reset in order for the shell to change. • Use this picture as the background: You can select a picture as the Desktop background. • Notifications: If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display. • Launch an application Startup: A window is displayed listing all of the installed and added applications. Any applications selected will startup after a reboot. The following item is not optional: •

4.21.3

Administrator Key Sequence: Sets the key sequence to open PsionVU Access.

Restrictions This section deals with items that are by default available to users but can be restricted by an administrator. Advanced The Advanced menu lists the system features you can restrict or block.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Settings

Notifications The Notifications menu allows you to block or disable notifications.

4.21.4

Control Panel Settings In these menus you can set which applets and tabs you want to Hide in Control Panel, and which applets and tabs will be Accessible as a shortcut icon from the Desktop.

4.21.5

•

You have the option of setting the entire applet or specific tabs within the applet as hidden or accessible. Any applet that can’t be set is greyed out.

•

You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the following message is displayed: “!Maximum 18 entries reached.”

Import/Export to File This option enables you to Export your settings file (.xml), and save it in the location of your choice. In addition, an Administrator has the option to Import these settings from one device to multiple devices of the same operating system.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Remote Desktop Connection

Important: A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all Psion .xml files with a predefined name so that other Psion utilities can locate it.

Tapping on the Export button will display a “Save As” Export Settings dialog, with the default name PsionVU_Settings.xml, which the Administrator can change even after it has been saved. The .xml file contains all of the PsionVU configured settings, including the Administrator Password. When the file is imported to a device, the new password is applied immediately. •

•

4.22

Whether choosing to import or export files, the same file location options under My Device will be listed. Following the action, a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file will be displayed. With the exception of the password, changes made to settings will take effect only after a warm reset. If further changes to the configuration are made, they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation. After importing a file, a dialog will appear to enable you to reset now or later.

Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection, located in Start>Programs, is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine, using the Omnii (Windows Embedded CE device). Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this connection: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/mobility/getstarted/remoteintro.mspx or contact Psion support services. Locate the office closest to you at: www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm

4.23

Scanners The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner configuration and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize. The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Barcodes

Important: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

You can test the scanner to ensure that it is operating properly by pointing the scanner window at a barcode that your scanner was designed to decode —for example, a 1D UPC barcode or 2D barcode. Press the SCAN key or pistol trigger, and check for a valid decode on the hand-held’s screen. For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter E: “Omnii Specifications”.

4.23.1

Barcodes

4.23.1.1

Scanner The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held: Decoded (internal), Decoded (Intermec ISCP), Imager and Non-decoded. The symbologies listed in the Barcodes tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always defer to your barcode scanner’s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter. Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel, under the System Properties tab.

Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘on’) only those codes that are required by the application. For information on configuring the barcode symbologies, see Appendix C: “Scanner Settings”. Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.

4.23.1.2 Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters or all scanner parameters. •

Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop-up menu.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Options

•

Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings. To reset a single parameter to its default setting:

4.23.2

•

Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset.

•

Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting.

Options This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters, display, and data handling options associated with your scanner.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Options

4.23.2.1 Double Click Parameters Click Time (msec) This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature. A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan. Click Data This parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your Omnii following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.

4.23.2.2 Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled, the type of barcode and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen. Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated. Scan Result Time (sec) The value assigned to the Scan Result Time parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of 0 (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value. Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point the scanner away from the barcode and press the trigger. Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not the Omnii emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it. Multiple Beep Tones You can set the audible scanner ‘beep’ to emit a series of three beeps instead of one. Set this parameter to on to enable the multiple beep tones.

100

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Translations

Good Scan Vibrates and Bad Scan Vibrates

These parameters determine whether or not the Omnii creates a vibration when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to on to enable the vibration. You can set the Number and Duration of vibrations, as well as the Pause between vibrations. The screen above shows the default settings. Soft Scan Timeout This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec (default is 3 sec). Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output barcode are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if Scan Log File is enabled, there is a slight performance reduction when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.

4.23.2.3 Data Handling Codepage If you are encountering a scan failure because there is an unrecognized language character in the barcode, the Codepage option may correct the problem by allowing the ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 codepage to be used. The default value is Default Local ASCII. Important: Do not change this parameter from the default setting unless you are certain that it will correct your scan problem.

4.23.3

Translations The Translations menu allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a barcode and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful—if a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

101

Chapter 4: Configuration Translations

•

In the Translation menu, tap on the Case # to create rules.

•

Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules.

When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.

102

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Ports

4.23.3.1

Case Rules The case rules are defined as follows: • • • • • • •

No rule — ignored. Search and replace — replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.) Match at index — matches the match string at a specified index. Match and replace at index — matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it. Replace at index — replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range. Add barcode prefix/suffix — adds a global prefix or suffix. Verify barcode size — verifies the barcode size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creating subsequent rules. Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the barcode size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.

Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file (see “Scan Log File” on page 101) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing.

4.23.4

Ports Figure 4.5

Console and Port Replicator Port Settings

While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab. Use these settings to ensure that the communication ports on the Omnii match the settings of the serial devices to which they are connected. If the settings do not match exactly, the devices may not function. Note that some devices can auto-detect serial port settings (such as baud rate), and in this case the Omnii will dictate the settings. Baud rates often have a direct impact on performance—they should be set as high as possible while still ensuring reliable communication.

4.23.4.1

Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) are standard RS-232 DE-9 DTE ports on the Omnii port replicator module, available on some snap modules and cradle types. Enabled This parameter must be set to ON in order for the Omnii to recognize the device connected to the Port Replicator 9-pin (COM5). Power (COM6 only) Pin 9 on the Omnii COM6 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF. This parameter must be set to ON to enable power to a Snap Module or Vehicle cradle. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

103

Chapter 4: Configuration Ports

Baud Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer. Figure 4.6 Port Baud Rates

Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte. Most devices use 8-bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits. Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity.

Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits—1, 1.5 or 2—used for asynchronous communication. Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to an Omnii port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off, the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams.

Double-tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements. These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, suppose you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the ‘module to trigger’. Next, you assign a ‘trigger key’—for this example, . (period). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the ‘trigger key’, enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields. When you press the trigger key, the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key, the Trigger Off Sequence is sent, turning the trigger key on and off.

104

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Screen Rotation

4.24

Screen Rotation This option allows you to determine how your Omnii screen will behave depending on how the unit is oriented. •

Tap Start>Settings>Control Panel, and then tap on the Screen Rotation icon.

To Maintain Screen Orientation Choose either the Portrait or Landscape radio button and uncheck the Enable auto screen rotation box. Your screen will appear in that mode without rotating when the Omnii is moved about. To Enable Screen Rotation Check the Enable auto screen rotation box and the orientation you want. Your screen will flip vertically (Portrait mode) or horizontally (Landscape mode) as you rotate the Omnii. If you choose All orientations, the screen rotates to portrait or landscape to match the orientation of the Omnii. Note: Your screen orientation option starts once you press OK and then exit Control Panel. The Control Panel screen itself is always in upright Portrait mode.

4.25

Storage Manager The Storage Manager allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present in the Omnii, such as SD-MMC flash cards and Compact Flash cards.

4.25.1

Formatting a Memory Card Formatting a memory card bulk-erases it. Once a card is erased, partitions may be created in it, similarly to those on a hard drive. Memory-card devices are normally ‘mounted’ (made available to the system) automatically when they are inserted. They must be dismounted before they can be formatted. To format an entire memory card: 1. 2.

Select Start> Settings>Control Panel. In Control Panel, double-click on the Storage Manager icon. The Storage Manager menu opens:

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

105

Chapter 4: Configuration Creating Partitions

1. 2.

Select the memory card from the drop-down list. Press the Dismount button to dismount the memory card. All partitions on the card will be dismounted. 3. Press the Format button to format the memory card. All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process.

4.25.2

Creating Partitions Once the card is formatted, new partitions can be created in it. The default is to create one partition that occupies the whole card, but a card can be divided into more than one partition if desired. Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer. To create new partitions: 1.

Press the New button next to the Partitions list box. The Create New Partition dialog box appears:

1. 2.

Type a name for the partition. If more than one partition is desired, uncheck the Use All Available Diskspace check box, then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition. Press OK. The new partition appears in the Partitions list.

106

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Partition Management

The new partition is automatically mounted. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its name in the partition list. Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left, and additional partitions can be created in it.

4.25.3

Partition Management Partitions can be individually dismounted, mounted, deleted, or formatted as well. These and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog:

To dismount a partition: 1. 2. 3.

Choose the desired partition. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears. Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list. To delete a partition: 1. Select the desired partition. 2. Tap the Delete button. A warning dialog appears. 3. Tap the OK button. The partition is deleted. To format a partition: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

107

Chapter 4: Configuration Partition Management

Choose your format options. These options include: • Version of file system (FAT-16, for devices holding up to 4 GB; or FAT-32, for devices containing up to 32 GB). • Number of FATs (File-Allocation Tables). • Number of entries allowed in the root directory. • Cluster size (.5 KB to 64 KB). There are also two check boxes, which govern: • Whether to use the transaction-safe FAT file system (TFAT). This file system keeps multiple copies of the file-allocation table, changing one while maintaining another as a backup. • Whether to perform a quick format. Quick formatting removes all reference to data in the partition without erasing the actual partition. The partition will be treated as empty, and new data will overwrite it. 6. Tap Start. The partition is formatted. To mount a partition: 1. 2. 3.

Choose the desired partition. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears. Tap the Mount button. The partition is mounted. The asterisk appears next to its name in the partitions list. The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions. Partitions can be defragmented, and their file structure can be scanned.

108

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Stylus Properties

4.26

Stylus Properties Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor. •

4.26.1

Double-Tap •

4.26.2

In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon.

In the Double-Tap menu, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen.

Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the directions below. •

Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button.

•

Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen You will be prompted to save the calibration data. Note: If you do not receive a prompt to save your data, there could be a problem with your touchscreen hardware. Contact your Psion representative.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

109

Chapter 4: Configuration Touch

4.26.3

Touch This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen. •

4.27

Choose the Touch tab. Select the check box next to Disable the touch panel.

System Properties This program identifies the computer’s software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their identification, version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.

110

•

In Control Panel, choose the System Properties icon.

•

By choosing the Export button, you can create a log (SystemProperties.xml) of your current components, which will be placed in the My Device folder in Windows Explorer.

•

Instead of expanding each section of items individually, you can also choose to open all the lists at once by choosing the Expand button, which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Total Recall

4.28

Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot, as well as clone settings to other devices. This utility creates a restore point of a device at a known state. This can be used as a backup of the device (the administrator can clean the terminal and restore the profile at any time), or a clone (the administrator can store different configurations for different uses to clone to other hand-held computers). Note: Total Recall works differently (e.g. restore on cold boot or on clean boot) on different OS platforms and versions (e.g. Windows CE 5.0, 6.0, Windows Mobile, Windows Embedded Hand-held). For detailed information and other updates on Total Recall information, please go to the IngenuityWorking website at: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/total-recall.aspx •

In the Control Panel, choose the Total Recall icon.

In the start up screen, you can choose from four options: Create Backup, Create Clone, Manage Profile, and Delete Profile.

4.28.1

Creating a Backup •

Tap on the Create Backup button to begin the process.

This dialog box displays the Profile Name and the storage destination for the profile file. • •

In the Profile Name field, type a name for a profile. If you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile Location field and choose one of a number of folders.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

111

Chapter 4: Configuration Creating a Clone

Important: Any profile not stored in persistent memory (Flash Disk, external USB drive) will be erased during a clean boot, therefore you should store profiles on a persistent drive. When performing an autorestore, the program only searches for the profile located in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored. Only one profile can reside in that folder. - Tap on Start. A backup of the current settings will be created and saved to the specified location. The unit will then reboot. To view profiles and choose restore options, refer to “Managing Profiles” on page 113.

4.28.2

Creating a Clone Cloning allows you to copy settings or configurations from one computer to another. There are two types of clones to choose from: a Full Clone and a Settings Only Clone. A Full Clone contains all files, most of the registry, and the settings files. Important: The target device for a Full Clone MUST have the same model type and OS build as the source, otherwise problems can occur. For example, if the target device has a newer build of the OS, the new build may have a different set of registry keys that may conflict with the source. A Settings Only Clone can be copied to a wider array of devices, but it should not be used as an autorestore profile.

112

•

Tap on the Create Clone button to begin the process. Your Omnii model type and OS will be identified in the cloning statement to ensure that you target devices of the same type. Give the clone profile a name and location, then tap on Next.

•

In this menu, select All for a Full Clone, or Selected Options for a Settings Only Clone. If you choose Selected Options, a menu will open to enable you to decide which options you want cloned.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Managing Profiles

4.28.3

Managing Profiles You can view profiles and choose profile options from the menus in this section.

4.28.3.1 Viewing a Profile •

Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles. Highlight a profile, and then you can choose to View the Profile Summary and go on to the next menu, Profile Details. List of profiles

Profile Summary

Profile Details

4.28.3.2 Profile Options •

Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles, as shown above. Highlight a profile, and tap on the Next button to choose from options to restore or clone the profile. You can choose from four profile options: Restore Now, Set for Autorestore, Upload to A.R.C., and Clone to USB.

•

Next, tap on the option button you want to use: Restore Now – restores the profile immediately. If you are restoring a profile that is a backup or Full Clone, the computer will clean reset first; if the profile is a Settings Only Clone, it will not. Set for AutoRestore – creates a profile that is automatically restored following a cold reset or a clean start. The profile is stored in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. Important: After setting an autorestore profile, that profile will overwrite any other profile already placed in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. In an autorestore, Total Recall only restores the profile located in the \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

113

Chapter 4: Configuration Managing Profiles

Upload to A.R.C – uploads the profile to the Active Remote Configuration server. After you tap on Send, a message will come up either confirming that the upload was complete or that the connection to the server failed.

Clone to USB – writes a clone of the profile to the USB drive. After you tap on the button, a message will come up either confirming that the USB drive is ready for deployment, or that it is not available. When you are ready to install the profile on another unit, turn on the next computer to be cloned and insert the USB key. The profile will be automatically installed to the computer’s \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. There is a short delay in deployment so that you can cancel the process if needed. USB drive prepared for cloning

114

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Autorun installation on next Omnii

Chapter 4: Configuration Deleting a Profile

4.28.4

Deleting a Profile • •

In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Delete Profile. In the next screen, locate your backup file, and tap on OK.

A warning pop-up screen appears asking if you’re certain that you want to delete this file. •

4.29

Tap on Yes to delete the file.

TweakIt

This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network, servers, driver, and radio) and provides a Registry Editor.

4.29.1

Advanced

4.29.1.1

Advanced CE Services Settings

FTP Server This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder—that is, data are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server. If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

115

Chapter 4: Configuration Advanced

4.29.1.2

Advanced Interface and Network Settings

Enable IPv6 This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification, version 6, that has been published to enable 128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4). Modem Logging When this option is enabled, the Omnii logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.

4.29.1.3

Advanced Services Settings

SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Omnii time with the server time. A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered.

116

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Registry Editor

4.29.2

Registry Editor

This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values. Warning:

4.30

Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the Omnii.

Voice – Using the WWAN Phone Dialer If the WWAN modem is installed and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar. •

Double click on the Phone icon to access the phone dialer.

Note: On 55- and 66-key Omnii keyboards, you can also press the [Talk] key to display the phone keypad providing it has been activated. The [Talk] key is labelled with a green telephone receiver icon. Refer to “Sending and Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard” on page 118 for details. You can also follow the steps below to access the phone dialer: • To access the dialer, tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. • Tap on the Wireless WAN icon, and then tap on the Voice tab. The Voice tab displays a phone dialer used to dial phone numbers. The Voice menu provides commands which allow you to manage your phone contacts, view your phone history, and so on.

Phone Number Entry Field Send Button Backspace Button End Button Universal International Dialing Prefix

Mute Button

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

117

Chapter 4: Configuration Dialing a Number

4.30.1

Dialing a Number To make a phone call: •

Type the recipient’s phone number in the phone number entry field. - Send button – tap to dial the number you typed. - Backspace button – tap to erase characters in the phone number entry field. - End button – tap to disconnect the phone call. - Mute button – During a phone call, tap to mute sound transmission. Tap again to restore sound. - + button – When making an international call, the + sign can be used as a universal substitute for any international dialing prefix and is guaranteed to work worldwide. The entry sequence must be as follows: + country code followed by phone number. Example: A standard phone number: 011 36 30 275 28466 using the + substitution is typed as follows: +36 30 275 28466 The + symbol replaces the universal dialing prefix 011.

Sending and Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard The 55-key and the 66-key Omnii keyboards come equipped with phone keys—each has a [Talk] and an [End] key on the physical keyboard. • •

Press the [Talk] key to answer a call or to display the onscreen phone keypad so you can initiate a call. Press the [End] key to terminate a phone call.

[Talk] key

4.30.2

Receiving an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call: •

118

Tap on the [Talk] button; it’s labelled with a green phone receiver.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

[End] key

Chapter 4: Configuration Voice Menu

4.30.3

Voice Menu This menu allows you to manage calls, view your call history, and if required, assign a call forwarding service to your hand-held.

4.30.3.1

Call Management The Call Management option only becomes available in the Voice menu when at least one phone call is either On hold or Active. When you choose this command, the currently active phone call is listed in a dialog box.

Using the drop-down menu, you can choose to: Hang Up All Calls - This option only appears when more than one call is listed. Hang Up - This option disconnects only the call you’ve highlighted in the list. Hold - This option places the call you’ve highlighted on hold. Retrieve - This option is only available when a call is on hold, and choosing it retrieves the call you have highlighted from hold. • In the Call Management list, highlight the phone number to which you’d like to apply a command. • Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the command on the highlighted phone number. If you have two active calls on your hand-held, one On Hold and one Active, you can set up a conference call between yourself and the other callers. To set up a conference call: • Highlight the phone number that is currently On Hold, and choose Retrieve. Tap on Execute. Both calls will be listed as Active in the Call Management list. All calls are now conferenced so that you as well as your callers can speak to one another.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

119

Chapter 4: Configuration Voice Menu

4.30.3.2 Call Lists

The Call List command manages your call history, listing calls you’ve Dialed, Received and Missed. When you choose one of these commands, a dialog box lists the phone numbers. A drop-down menu provides a list of commands you can execute on a phone number in the Call List. You can choose to: • • •

Dial the number, Send a New SMS, or Add to phonebook to add the highlighted phone number to your phonebook. (Refer to “Phonebook” on page 121 for details additional details about the Phonebook.) In the Call List: • • •

Highlight the phone number with which you want to work. Choose a command in the drop-down menu. Tap on the Execute button to carry out the command.

4.30.3.3 Services

The Service menu offers several options for your hand-held to customize the behaviour of your phone. You can, for example, bar incoming calls, tailor to whom your caller ID will be transmitted, set up call forwarding, enable the hearing aid service, and so on. If you choose an option, it may take a number of seconds for your unit to read the network settings. Note: Keep in mind that some services may not be supported by your network, or they may not have been subscribed to. • Tap on the service you want to enable. The service dialog boxes allow you to tailor your available services to meet your requirements.

120

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration File Menu – Phonebook Management

Voicemail Access If your service includes Voicemail, choosing this option for the first time displays a screen in which you can enter your voice mail provider phone number.

4.30.4

File Menu – Phonebook Management Tapping on the File menu provides access to your Phonebook. Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store frequently used phone numbers. When no numbers have been added to your phonebook, the only command available to you is New Entry.

To add a new phone number to your phonebook: •

Choose New Entry in the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute.

• • •

Type the name corresponding to the phone number you want to add. Press Tab and type the phone number you want to store. Tap in the check box next to Store in SIM to save the phone number there, or leave this check box blank if you prefer not to store the number on the SIM card. • Tap on the Execute button to save the phone number in your Phonebook. Phonebook entries are saved even after you exit Wireless WAN. Once you’ve added a phone number to the Phonebook, a list of new commands is available in the dropdown menu.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

121

Chapter 4: Configuration Volume & Sounds Properties

You can choose one of the following: • New Entry to add another phone number, • New SMS (Short Message Service) to send a new SMS, • Edit Entry to change an existing name and/or phone number, or • Delete Entry to erase an existing phone entry. In the Phonebook: • •

4.31

Highlight the entry with which you want to work. Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the command.

Volume & Sounds Properties The Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth. The beeper is used for the standard sounds: key clicks, screen taps, and scanning. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and .wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver. •

4.31.1

Volume Adjustments

• •

122

In the Control Panel, choose the Volume & Sounds icon.

Slide the volume button to the left to lower the volume or to the right to increase the volume. Under the heading Enable sounds for, enable the conditions under which you want the hand-held to emit a sound.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Sound Adjustments

4.31.2

Sound Adjustments

This dialog box allows you to assign sounds to identify particular actions. For example, you can choose the sound your hand-held will emit when you close a program and choose another sound for a failed scan, etc.

4.32

Wi-Fi Config The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11a/b/g/n radio for one or more wireless network profiles. A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options. Note: In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator. To launch the Wi-Fi Config application: •

Tap on Start>Programs>Wi-Fi Config.

The Wi-Fi Config screen is displayed.

4.32.1

Wi-Fi Config: Status The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which the Omnii is configured to connect. When there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

123

Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure

Disable/Enable Radio: This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether the radio is turned off or on.

4.32.2

Wi-Fi Config: Configure •

To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the Configure tab.

Connect: Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration. Add New: Used to create a new wireless network configuration. Edit: Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration. Remove: Used to delete a wireless network configuration. Scan: Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network in the list, and tap on Add New to activate the network. There are two methods available when configuring a radio network—you can either scan for an existing network or manually create a network. If you tap on the Scan button, a list of networks detected by the radio is displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add additional information, depending on your network requirements.

4.32.2.1 Manually Creating a Network If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button, you can create a network manually. Important: The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described here.

124

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure

•

Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for your network.

4.32.2.2 Authentication Mode The Omnii supports several classes of authentication—Open, WEP, WPA/WPA2 (Personal PSK, Enterprise, CCKM-WPA, CCKM-WPA2), and 802.1x with EAP. Tapping on the Auth. Mode menu displays your authentication options.

Note: Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields appropriate to the authorization mode you’ve chosen. Open Authentication Open authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, the Omnii will connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If you choose this option, you can specify the type of WEP authentication—Open or Shared, the WEP security key length—64 bit or 128 bit and the key type—ASCII or Hex. WEP Key fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point. WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key) When PSK is selected, either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK—a shared key must be configured on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the Encryption drop-down menu: TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES. 802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise, CCKM-WPA & CCKM-WPA2 These authentication modes use 802.1X with EAP authentication. When 802.1X is selected, the Omnii uses WEP encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the others, the user may choose TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES encryption.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

125

Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure

4.32.2.3 Encryption The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data. Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop-down menu. Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth. Mode you’ve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu will not be available at all.

4.32.2.4 EAP This menu allows you to choose the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for 802.1x authentication to an access point.

The following EAP types are supported by Wi-Fi Config: • •

• •

•

• •

126

TLS: Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication. PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traffic. MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method. This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains. PEAPv1-GTC: PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords (OTPs) for authentication against OTP data bases such as SecureID. LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off-line dictionary attacks. FAST-MSCHAPv2: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains. Complete the fields in the Configure Profile screen. If you’re uncertain about some of the options, your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information for your wireless network. Once you’ve completed the necessary fields, tap on OK.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure

4.32.2.5 Verify Server Certificate When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked, the Omnii will verify the certificate provided by the authentication server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on the Omnii for the verification.

4.32.2.6 Enable OPMK When used with compatible wireless infrastructure, Opportunistic Key Caching (OPMK) reduces the number of full authentications required when roaming. Only available with WPA2-Enterprise (EAP) authentication mode.

4.32.2.7 Connecting the Wireless Network Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab. An [X] next to a network indicates that this is the network to which the Omnii will connect.

• Tap on the Connect button to activate your network. The Status tab is displayed. The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802.11a/b/g/n radio attempts to connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the Status tab is populated with the appropriate information about your network.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

127

Chapter 4: Configuration Configuring TCP/IP

4.32.3

Configuring TCP/IP If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.

4.32.3.1

IP Address To assign an IP address for your Omnii: •

Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar,

or Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections. Tap on the radio icon for which you want to assign an IP address—in the sample screen below, the icon is labelled SDIO86861.

128

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Configuring TCP/IP

The Wireless Statistics screen is displayed. •

Tap on the IP Information tab.

Figure 4.7

SDIO86861 IP Information

Note: When DHCP is enabled, tapping the ‘Renew’ button forces the Omnii to renew or find a new IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your hand-held is dropped from the network. To define a static IP address: •

Tap on the Configure button.

• •

Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address to select it. Type an IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields. Press [Enter] to save your information.

4.32.3.2 Name Server Note: If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically.

• •

In the SDIO86861 IP Information tab (see Figure 4.7), tap on the Configure button. Tap on the Name Servers tab.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

129

Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Advanced

The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###.

4.32.4

Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Use Windows to configure my wireless settings In the Advanced tab you can set Windows to configure the radio, using Wireless Zero Config. •

Tap on the check box to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to enable this option.

Tap here to add a checkmark to activate the Windows radio configuration.

Power Save Mode This allows you to set the 802.11 power saving mode of the radio to: CAM (continuous access—always on) (recommended); or MAX_PSP (maximum power saving mode). Roaming - RSSI Threshold This sets the RSSI threshold value, below which the radio will start scanning for new access points when roaming. Values range from -55 to -90 dBm. Roaming - AP Delta This sets how much greater (in dBm) the RSSI of a new access point must be than the RSSI of the currently associated access point in order for the hand-held to initiate a roam. Values range from 5 to 30 dBm. Concluding the Wi-Fi Configuration If you’ve made changes in the Advanced menus, you will need to warm reset your Omnii. • Choose Start>Shutdown>Warm Reset. • A dialog box is displayed letting you know that you will lose all unsaved data. Tap on OK. Once the reset is complete, if you checked the box next to Use Windows to configure my wireless settings, the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed on the hand-held. Refer to Appendix H: “Wireless Zero Config Settings” for details.

130

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 4: Configuration Monitoring the Network Connection

4.32.5

Monitoring the Network Connection The radio signal icon in the taskbar indicates the strength of the communication link with an 802.11 access point. To access the radio signal icon: • Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the wireless statistics dialog box. To access the radio signal icon using the keyboard: • • • •

Press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu. Highlight Shortcuts and then choose System Tray from the sub-menu. Use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] arrow keys to highlight the radio signal icon in the taskbar. Press [Enter] to display the Wireless Statistics dialog box. Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by logging in again.

4.33

WiFi Connect A.R.C. The WiFiConnectARC utility on the desktop provides a quick method to configure a device for use on a private network, primarily for use with Active Remote Configuration (A.R.C.). When you click on this icon, WiFiConnect A.R.C. configures the default WiFi interface. The WEP key is set to PsionPsion123. The SSID is set to Psion. The default interface becomes the active interface. Keep in mind that you must configure the access point and the hand-held(s) to use the same settings. Refer to the Active Remote Configuration (A.R.C.) Administrators Guide, PN 8000252, for details about updating devices on your network. This manual is available at: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/1189.aspx

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

131

ACCESSORIES

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

Pistol Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Removing the Trigger Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carrying and Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Installation — Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Charging a Battery Installed in the Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.1 Docking station does not seem to power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.2 The Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.3 The Omnii charge indicator LED is red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3 Quad Docking Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3.2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3.3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.4 Cleaning the ST4004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5.1 The Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5.3 The Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5.4 The Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 135 . 135 . 135 . 136 . 137 . 137 . 137 .138 .138 .140 .140 . 141 . 141 . 141 . 141 . 141 .142 .142 .143 .144 .144 .144 .144 .144 .145 .145 .145 .145 .145 .145 .146 .146 .146 . 147 . 147 . 147 . 147 .148 .148 .148 .149 .149 .149 .149 .149

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

133

5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion and Removal of Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.1 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.2 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.2.1 Extreme Wet Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.4.3 Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle 5.8 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.2 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.3 Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.4 Charging Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.5.1 Improper Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.5.2 Power Self-test LEDs Don’t Light Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . .

134

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.150 .152 . 153 . 153 . 153 .154 .154 .154 .156 .156 . 157 . 157 . 157 . 157 .157 .158 .158

Chapter 5: Accessories Pistol Grips

5.1

Pistol Grips There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of back cover and scanner/imager installed in your hand-held. Refer to Table 5.1 for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the types of back covers and scanners/imagers with which they are compatible. Table 5.1

Pistol Grip Model Numbers Pistol Grip Description

5.1.1

Model Number

Pistol Grip Standard Pod Kit

ST6000

Pistol Grip Standard Back A Kit

ST6100

Pistol Grip Standard Back B Kit

ST6400

Pistol Grip Freezer Standard Back Kit

ST6500

Removing the Trigger Cover Before installing the pistol grip, you need to remove the trigger cover. Using a flathead screwdriver, gently and carefully pry the trigger cover off the hand-held. Figure 5.1

5.1.2

Removing the Trigger Cover

Attaching the Pistol Grip Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly. The pistol grip is attached to the back of the Omnii using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the Omnii casing (see Figure 5.2). Four M3x6 Phillips head screws are provided. • •

Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the hand-held. Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip in place.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

135

Chapter 5: Accessories Carrying and Protective Accessories

Figure 5.2

5.2

Attaching the Pistol Grip

Carrying and Protective Accessories Note: The Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines. There are several Omnii carrying and protective accessories to help you work safely and comfortably. Attaching Carrying Accessories If your Omnii is not fitted with a hand strap, you can install it using the carrying accessory kit supplied. You’ll need: • A Phillips head screwdriver. Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.

Table 5.2

Accessories Model Numbers Accessory

Model Number

Wrist Strap

ST6040

Hand Strap

ST6025

Soft Shell Holster

ST6050

Hard Shell Holster

ST6055

Forklift Holster

ST6051

Carrying Case

ST6090

Pouch

ST6091

Screen Protector

RV6105

Rubber Boot: Yellow – Standard back covers A & B

136

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

ST6080

Chapter 5: Accessories The Hand Strap - Model ST6025

Table 5.2

Accessories Model Numbers Accessory

5.2.1

Model Number

Grey – Standard back covers A & B

ST6081

Yellow – Expansion Back Covers

ST6082

Grey – Expansion Back Covers

ST6083

Yellow – Expansion Back Covers, WWAN End-cap

ST6084

Grey – Expansion Back Covers, WWAN End-cap

ST6085

Blue – Freezer Standard Back Covers

ST6086

The Hand Strap - Model ST6025 • Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the hand-held near the top of the unit (see Figure 5.3), using the two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory. • Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the hand-held, and hook the clip at the bottom of the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack. Figure 5.3

Attaching the hand strap

Clip Hand strap slot

5.2.2

Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090 A carrying case is available for the Omnii to shield the unit from damage. It is compatible with the hand strap. A variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap attached to your unit.

5.2.3

Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 A hard shell holster that includes a belt, leg tie-down, and tether, can be used to hang the Omnii with a pistol grip from your waist, on either your left or right side. • • • •

Feed the belt through the top panel of the holster, and adjust the belt as needed. If using the leg tie-down strap, wrap it around your leg and snap the buckle closed. Adjust the tightness of the strap for security and comfort. Place the Omnii into the holster with the grip extending back through the custom opening. If desired, attach the tether to the pistol grip.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

137

Chapter 5: Accessories Power Accessories

Figure 5.4

5.3

Hard Shell Holster (pistol grip tether not shown)

Power Accessories The following accessories can be ordered for your Omnii: Table 5.3 Description

5.3.1

Model Number

AC Wall Adaptor

ST1050 or ST1050-AR

Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor

ST3113

Snap Module – Charger Only

ST4000

Snap Module – USB Host/Client plus Charger

ST4001

Snap Module – DE9M powered serial plus Charger

ST4005

Snap Modules Note: The Snap Modules are shipped with their own quick start guide (Omnii Snap Modules Quick Start Guide, PN 8000220). The guide should be reviewed for additional information and updates. Snap Modules are mobile power chargers for the Omnii. They are compatible with the AC wall adaptor (Model ST1050 or ST1050-AR) and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor (Model ST3113). Three types of Snap Modules are available: • •

•

138

Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): powers and charges the hand-held. Model ST4001 (USB variant): powers and charges the hand-held. It provides communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port. When attached to the Omnii, it allows ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center connectivity with your PC, and the use of a USB device such as a USB memory key or supported peripheral. Model ST4005 (Serial variant): provides a powered DE9M serial connector. It powers and charges the Omnii, and provides serial communications to tethered devices. The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to 115,200 bps. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to off. To enable power to this port, in your Omnii desktop, go to Control Panel>Scanners, which opens the Scanner Settings menus. In the Ports menu, select on for the Power parameter under the COM6 port.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Snap Modules

Figure 5.5

Snap Module Ports

ST4001 (USB)

ST4000 (Charger)

No ports

Micro-B port

ST4005 (Serial)

Type A (Host) USB port (5 VDC, 500 mA max)

Powered DE9M Serial port (9 pin, 5VDC, 1A max)

Back of Snap Modules DC IN port (12V, 2.5 A)

Figure 5.6

Snap Module Installation

Side rail

Locking clip

Hand strap slot

DC IN port

To attach the Snap Module charger to the Omnii: • •

•

Make sure that the charger connector and the Omnii docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them. A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of the charger. To attach the charger, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide up until the locking clips snap into place (Refer to Figure 5.6). To remove the charger, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the Omnii side rails and slide the adaptor off.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

139

Chapter 5: Accessories AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR

•

Connect the charger to an AC or DC power source using the appropriate regional plug or cable. Then connect the charger’s DC plug into the Snap Module’s DC jack. You can also attach an ST4001 or ST4005 Snap Module to the Omnii and use the Omnii battery to power USB or serial peripherals, for enhanced mobility.

Note: If you are using a hand strap, there is no need to remove it before installing the Snap Module, since the Omnii hand strap slot will still be accessible.

5.3.2

AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station or Snap Module allows you to operate your handheld using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit. The ST1050 is shipped with adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions: United Kingdom, Australia, Europe and North America. •

• •

Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor. Insert the DC plug into the docking station or Snap Module jack. Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.

Figure 5.7

ST1050 AC Wall Adaptor and plugs Adaptor plugs

AC power supply

DC power plug

The ST1050-AR wall adapter is kitted with an AC plug that is suitable for use in Argentina.

5.3.3

Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet when used in conjunction with a Snap Module. Figure 5.8

ST3113 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor DC power plug

Adaptor plug

• • •

Attach a Snap Module to the base of the hand-held. Refer to “Snap Modules” on page 138 if you require further details. Insert the DC power plug on the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor into the DC IN port on the Snap Module. Insert the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle. Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.

140

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information

5.4

Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information

5.4.1

Important Charger Safety Instructions Important: Before charging a battery with a desktop docking station, it is critical that you review the safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) and the Omnii Hand-Held Accessories Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000205).

5.4.2

Charging the Battery The Omnii Hand-Held Computer operates with lithium-ion battery pack Model ST3001. Preparing the unit for operation requires that the battery pack be charged and installed in the hand-held. Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. Currently the following are available: •

The Snap Module is a mobile adaptor for the Omnii. Three models are available—see “Snap Modules” on page 138. • The AC Wall Adaptor operates as an AC power source and also charges the battery installed in the unit—see “AC Wall Adaptor - Models ST1050 and ST1050-AR” on page 140. • The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor powers the Omnii and recharges the battery using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet—see “Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113” on page 140. • The Desktop Docking Stations operate as both chargers and docking stations. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in the Omnii and a spare battery can be charged. Priority is given to charging the hand-held's battery. See “Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003” on page 142. Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity. Table 5.4

Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times at 25°C (77°F)

% Charge Completed

During Sleep Mode

While Operating

100%

4 hrs.

8 hrs.

75%

2 hrs.

6 hrs.

Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).

5.4.3

Installation — Chargers and Docking Stations When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines. •

Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust, water and other liquids, and contaminants. • Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature—between 18°C and 25°C (64°F to 77°F) for maximum performance. After unpacking your unit: • •

5.4.4

Visually inspect the charger for possible damage. Install the IEC power cord (if applicable) and apply power.

Operator Controls The Omnii docking stations and chargers have no operator controls.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

141

Chapter 5: Accessories Power Consumption Considerations

5.4.5

Power Consumption Considerations Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit.

5.5

Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 Note: Specialized versions of the desktop docking station are available for Argentina and Korea. For Argentina, model number ST4002-AR is packaged with a wall adaptor and a suitable, regional AR plug. For Korea, model number ST4002-KR is packaged with a wall adaptor and a KR plug.

Important: The desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide (ST4002 and ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide, PN 8000203). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates. The Omnii can be inserted into two desktop docking stations which are designed to charge the battery installed in the hand-held along with a spare battery pack: Models ST4002 and ST4003. Important: These docking stations can only be used to charge Psion approved lithium-ion batteries. The ST4002 and ST4003 desktop docking stations feature: • • • •

Fast charging of the internal battery. Fast charging of the spare battery pack. A Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer, keyboard, etc. A Client USB port to connect the docking station to a PC. Note: The ST4002 desktop dock can be upgraded to include the DE9M and RJ45 interfaces by using the ST4100 Xmod (Expansion Module).

The ST4003 desktop docking station additionally provides: •

A DE9M serial port (unpowered) and an RJ45 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Both these interfaces are compatible with the USB to Ethernet/serial drivers included in the Omnii (see Figure 5.10 on page 143).

Figure 5.9

Desktop Docking Station - Models ST4002 and ST4003 Omnii charge indicator LED (far left) (Indicates charge status of internal Omnii battery.)

Omnii charging bay

Release button

Spare battery

Spare battery charging bay

Spare battery LED (Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charging bay of the docking station.)

142

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Charging a Battery Installed in the Omnii

The desktop docking station storage temperature is -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to 140°F). Operating temperature and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F). The desktop docking station uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring the shortest possible charge time. See “Battery Details” on page 21 for more information regarding battery capacity, charge times and battery life. See “Charging the Spare Battery” on page 144 for spare battery charge information. Figure 5.10 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station

Locking arm Omnii charging bay

Spare battery charging bay

Connector pins

DC IN port

RJ45 Ethernet port Host USB port

Client USB port DE9M serial port

5.5.1

Charging a Battery Installed in the Omnii •

Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet. • Slide the hand-held into the docking station, making certain that the hand-held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins and engages the locking arms of the docking station. When the Omnii is switched on, a message is displayed briefly on the screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station and the docking station icon is displayed in the taskbar. The LED on the Omnii lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use—the battery will not be overcharged.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

143

Chapter 5: Accessories Indicators

5.5.2

Indicators The front-mounted LED on the desktop docking station indicates the spare battery charge status. The LED on the Omnii is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily. Table 5.5

Docking Station Battery Charge LED Behaviour

Charge LED Behaviour

Function

OFF

No battery detected.

Solid Green

Battery charging complete.

Flashing Green

Charge in progress.

Flashing Yellow

Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.

Solid Red

A charging timeout, unable to read battery, or non Psion battery.

5.5.3

Operation

5.5.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery The desktop docking station supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger. When installed in the dock, the Omnii battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit has external power and can charge the internal battery. The Omnii charge indication follows the same convention as the charger's spare battery indicator (Figure 5.9 on page 142). Note: Battery charging continues whether the Omnii is switched on or off.

5.5.3.2

Charging the Spare Battery Important: Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity. •

Install the battery in the battery charging bay (rear slot of the desktop docking station). Place the battery contacts down to mate with the connector, and pivot the battery into place in the battery charging bay. • The desktop docking station spare battery LED lights up immediately. During charge the LED will be flashing green. • When the battery has finished charging, the LED turns solid green. • The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green. A full charge will take 3 to 4 hours for a 5000 mAh battery. This may take up to 8 hours if the hand-held is also docked and charging.

5.5.4

Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. •

144

Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the desktop docking station. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Troubleshooting

5.5.5

Troubleshooting The indicators, applications, and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock (as opposed to a charger) are installed on the Omnii—no applications are present on the docking station itself.

5.5.5.1

Docking station does not seem to power on. • •

5.5.5.2

When first connected to the DC power supply, the charger LED should flash a sequence of red, yellow, and green. If not, the charger is defective and requires service.

The Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. When the Omnii is docked into a powered desktop docking station and the Omnii charge indicator LED stays off, there could be a problem with the hand-held or with the docking station. Use a hand-held with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem. Note: The desktop docking station charge LED only shows the status of the spare battery.

5.5.5.3

The Omnii charge indicator LED is red. If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the hand-held is docked: • • •

5.5.5.4

Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. • • •

5.5.5.5

Remove the Omnii and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable. Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again. If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, the hand-held requires service.

Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger. If the charge slot LED continues to show red with the known working battery, the charger is defective and requires service. Your Psion battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity performance. If the battery or charger are not Psion approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the spare charge slot LED or the Omnii LED will display red.

Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. • • • • •

Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?). Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot. Try inserting a battery that you know to be working into the charger slot. Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power-up. If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and requires service.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

145

Chapter 5: Accessories Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004

5.6

Quad Docking Station – Model No. ST4004 Important: The quad docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide—Omnii ST4004 Quad Docking Station Quick Start Guide (PN 8000222). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

Important: When ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320/IEC-60320 C13 power cord separately. Figure 5.11

Front view

Charging bays (4)

Docking connectors (4)

Figure 5.12 Rear view

RJ45 Ethernet ports

DC IN connector

The ST4004 Quad Docking Station is designed to accept up to four Omnii hand-held computers. The docking station powers the units and their internal battery charger. The docking station also connects up to four of the hand-held computers to a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer. An additional Ethernet interface is available for connecting more docking stations downstream, up to 4 on the same network.

5.6.1

Operator Controls The ST4004 has no operator controls or power switch.

5.6.2

Indicators The quad docking station is equipped with Ethernet activity and link LEDs (see Figure 5.14).

146

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Quad Docking Station Operation

5.6.3

Quad Docking Station Operation

5.6.3.1

Charging the Omnii Battery •

Insert the DC power plug into the ST4004 rear DC IN connector (see Figure 5.14). Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.

The ST4004 supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger. Normally, a full charge of the battery will take from 3 to 4 hours. • • • •

Insert up to four Omnii computers into the docking station charging bays, pressing down gently but firmly to seat them securely. During the charge, the Omnii LED slow flashes green. When the battery finishes charging, the LED turns solid green. To remove the Omnii, push down on the release mechanism on the front face of the docking bay. The hand-held will detach from the docking bay release arms and can be pulled up and out. Note: Battery charging continues whether the Omnii is switched on or off.

Figure 5.13 Insertion and removal of Omnii computers

Release arm Release mechanism

5.6.3.2

Installation Place the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust, water and other liquids, and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 0° C and 40° C (32° F to 104° F). The docking station will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature—a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F).

5.6.3.3

Connecting to the Ethernet Network Network Access The Omnii automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the network. To connect more docking stations downstream (up to 4 on the same network), use the Ethernet cable supplied with your quad docking station as the daisy chain cable (see Figure 5.15).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

147

Chapter 5: Accessories Cleaning the ST4004

Figure 5.14 Ethernet network connection

Left-side RJ45 port (Ethernet connector to network)

Activity LED (flashing green) Right-side RJ45 port (Ethernet connector to other docks) Link LED (solid amber)

10 or 100 Base-T Ethernet connector

Figure 5.15 Daisy chain configuration

Maximum of four ST4004 Quad Docking Stations on one network cable

Ethernet network cable Daisy chain cable Daisy chain cable

5.6.4

Cleaning the ST4004 Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the ST4004. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.

5.6.5

Troubleshooting

5.6.5.1

The Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off When the Omnii is docked in a powered ST4004 and the hand-held’s charge indicator LED stays off, there may be a problem with the Omnii or with the docking station. Make sure a battery is installed in the Omnii, otherwise use an Omnii with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.

148

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002

5.6.5.2

Power LED Does Not Light Up • • • •

5.6.5.3

Remove all Omnii units, and unplug the docking station. Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power. Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage. Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.

The Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow A flashing yellow Omnii charge LED (the left-most LED on the hand-held) indicates that the battery is not within the allowable charging temperature range – 0° C and 40° C (32° F to 104° F). Allow the battery to come to an acceptable range before reinserting the Omnii in the docking station.

5.6.5.4

The Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the Omnii is in any of the four bays, the quad dock cannot read the battery, is in charging timeout, or it is not a Psion battery. • • •

5.6.5.5

Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off • •

5.7

Remove the computers and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable. Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again. If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, the Omnii requires service.

Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect. If the adaptor LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service.

Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 Important: The vehicle cradles are shipped with their own quick start guide—Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide (PN 8000221). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates. The Omnii vehicle cradles are highly ruggedized, single station docks. Although they provide quick insertion and removal, the cradles hold the Omnii securely even when operated in high vibration environments (such as vehicles not equipped with suspensions). The Omnii vehicle cradle is available in two models: • •

Model ST1000 - Unpowered cradle. Model ST1002 - Powered cradle with communications port. A DE9M serial port (powered) and two USB Host interfaces.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

149

Chapter 5: Accessories Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations

Figure 5.16 Front and back of ST1002 with Omnii

Mounting holes

Release button

Power/Communications port

Psion also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand-held vehicle cradles, and the Omnii vehicle cradles are compatible with all of them.

5.7.1

Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations Warning:

Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer. Ensure that you read the ST1002 Vehicle Cradle Installation Instructions document (PN 1020305), enclosed with the ST1002, for important safety information on connecting fuses. Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion for assistance. Note also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.

Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws. The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use brackets with the MT3324 (short arm) or MT3325 (standard arm) kit. The ST1002 requires either the MT3326 or MT3327 bracket; the ST1000 requires the MT3328 bracket. Important: It is strongly recommended that all forklift mounting solutions use clamp bases rather than plate bases that require penetrating through the vehicle for installation.

150

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations

A clamp base is required to secure the vehicle cradle/arm assembly to the vehicle. Choose from one of the following clamp base sizes: • •

MT3505 MT3507

Table 5.6

Clamp and Rail Widths

Model

Rail Width

MT3505

Clamp base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 2" max. width

MT3507

Clamp base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 3" max. width

MT3509

Rail base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 1-1/4" to 1-7/8"

MT3510

Rail base (for 4" or 12" RAM arm), 2" to 2 1/2"

Figure 5.17 Clamp and Rail Bases (Torque to 26 in-lbs)

Important: Plate bases are not recommended for forklift mounting solutions. If a plate rather than a clamp base is used, you will need to penetrate into the structure of the vehicle, a process requiring additional hardware. The following plate bases are available: • VESA Plate – MT3501 • Circular Plate – MT3502

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

151

Chapter 5: Accessories Insertion and Removal of Omnii

Figure 5.18 MT3325 Standard Arm Kit with Omnii Vehicle Cradle Clamp and Rail Bases (Torque to 26 in-lbs)

Omnii

MT3325 Arm ST1002 Cradle (powered)

MT3326 Bracket

To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the bottom of the cradle. Leave a 7" (minimum) clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand-held. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location (Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide PN 8000221).

5.7.2

Insertion and Removal of Omnii If your Omnii is equipped with a cover, or the ST6025 Double Loop Handstrap, these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove other handstraps or pistol grips from the unit. • •

Slide the Omnii into the cradle, and press firmly downward until it locks into place. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on the Omnii to be certain that it is secure. To remove the Omnii, press the release button on the front of the cradle until it releases.

Figure 5.19 Inserting Omnii into the vehicle cradle

Release button

152

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle

5.7.3

Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle Two latches in the cradle hold the Omnii firmly in place. Although these latches are designed for at least 100,000 insertion and removal cycles, they will wear over time and will no longer lock the Omnii securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion. Partial disassembly is required.

5.7.4

ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation The ST1002 cradle is designed to allow the Omnii to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery installed in the Omnii is also recharged by the vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources over the range 11.5V to 30V. Voltages above that require the use of the preregulator (Model No. PS1350). Warnings: •

Applying a voltage greater than that specified, or reversing polarity, may result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty.

•

Operating an Omnii XT15f Arctic unit in operating temperatures from -30°C to +50°C, requires the use of the power preregulator Model No. PS1370.

The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or the power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For connector pinouts and a cable connections diagram, see “Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002” on page A-5. Figure 5.20 Connecting to vehicle power

CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power

CA3000 Vehicle Cradle

and Communications Cable

Power Cable

For a diagram of a power with communications setup, see “Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup” on page 155. The Omnii charging LED (see “Battery Charge Status LED” on page 29) indicates that external power is available, and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery.

5.7.4.1

Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider the following: • • • • • •

Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring. Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage. Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal. Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled. Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards. Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

153

Chapter 5: Accessories ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

5.7.4.2

Installation in High Voltage Vehicles Warning:

Voltages exceeding 30VDC are considered hazardous. Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 30VDC require special consideration, as listed below.

Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator, and does not get exposed to water or other liquids. Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death. Avoiding this hazard can be accomplished in the following way. • •

Use the PS1350 pre-regulator or, for freezer applications (-30°C), the PS1370 pre-regulator. Ensure the power connector is wrapped securely with a waterproof electrical tape and installed in a dry location on the vehicle, away from the vehicle operator’s reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing). • Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material (see Section 5.7.4.2.1: “Extreme Wet Environments” for additional details). All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle.

5.7.4.2.1 Extreme Wet Environments For extreme wet environments, or environments where it is difficult to restrict vehicle operator access to the power connector, Psion offers a waterproof heat shrink kit (PN 1030022). The kit contains 3 pieces of waterproof, high shrink ratio heat shrink tubing which can be used to encapsulate the entire connector assembly. If using this kit, please ensure that you order sufficient material to cover installation and service, remembering that heat shrink is one-time use, and must be replaced if it is removed from the connector for any reason.

5.7.4.3

Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle An optional 1.8 meter (6 foot) extension power cable (PN 13985-301 with motion detect or 13985-302) is available for your powered vehicle cradle. This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 4A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 4A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A. Installation of the 19440-XXX fuse assembly using a 4A 250V fuse installed is mandatory, except when using a CA3002 vehicle power cable. The 13985-XXX cables are not used with the CA3002. The 4A fuse is already included in the CA3002 vehicle connector assembly. Note: When connecting PN 13985-301 (Screen Blanking version), ensure that the screen blanking wires (clearly labelled) and the power wires (red/black leads) are reliably secured away from each other, or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation. A minimum 2.8mm distance, or 0.4mm distance through insulation, is required for the separation. The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the negative supply—this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body. You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch—that is, it cannot be turned on without the key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch. Keep in mind that the Omnii will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge. If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440-300) must be added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 4A fast blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly (PN 9016622). Warning:

154

11.5–30 Vdc input only, suitable for road vehicles. A pre-regulator is required for use on forklifts. For such installations Psion recommends using the PS1350 (15-90 VDC) preregulator or, for freezer applications, the PS1370 pre-regulator.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation

Figure 5.21 Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup

Omnii

MT3325 Arm/Ball Kit

ST1002

MT3502 Circular Plate

MT3326 Mounting Bracket CA3001 Cable

PS1350 Pre-regulator

OR CA3002 Vehicle Power

0 35

USB and Serial access*

er ow p t lif rk Fo

1 PS

e cl hi e V

Outlet (CLA) Adaptor r we po

* Note: The serial port is 5 VDC, 1 A maximum power out and is defaulted to off. To enable power to this port, in your Omnii desktop, go to Control Panel>Scanners, which opens the Scanner Settings menus. In the Ports menu, select ON for the Power parameter under the COM6 port.

Note: For the CA3002 Vehicle Power Outlet (CLA) Adaptor, replace with same fuse type and rating.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

155

Chapter 5: Accessories Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006

5.8

Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 The ST3006 is designed to charge up to six Omnii lithium-ion batteries at one time. Important: The battery charger is shipped with its own quick start guide—ST3006 6-Slot Battery Charger Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.

Important: When ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320/IEC-60320 C13 power cord separately. Figure 5.22 ST3006 Battery Charger TOP Charging bay (6)

Charger indicator LEDs (4 per bay)

BOTTOM

Rubber feet (5) DC IN connector

Drain holes (6)

5.8.1

Bracket mounting holes (2)

Installation The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031) or it can be operated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature—a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F).

156

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Chapter 5: Accessories Operator Controls

The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit). After unpacking the unit: • •

Visually check the charger for damage. Install the IEC power cord and apply power. Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.

All charge indicators flash momentarily at power up to indicate that the charger is ready for operation. If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the Omnii 6-Slot Battery Charger ST3006 Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204) included with the charger kit. Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity.

5.8.2

Operator Controls The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power.

5.8.3

Charge Indicators Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery. When the Omnii batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charging bays in use indicate the status of the charge. Table 5.7

Charge Status Indicator LEDs

Charge LED Behaviour

5.8.4

Function

OFF

No battery detected.

Solid Green

Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.

Flashing Green

Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.

Flashing Yellow

Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.

Solid Red

Unable to read battery, charging timeout, or non Psion battery.

Charging Batteries •

Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place. The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED shows charging is under way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately. If the battery temperature is outside 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F), the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take 4.5 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green. When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot.

5.8.5

Troubleshooting

5.8.5.1

Improper Battery Storage Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not recommended. Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time. See the battery handling recommendations in “The Battery” on page 14.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

157

Chapter 5: Accessories Troubleshooting

5.8.5.2

Power Self-test LEDs Don’t Light Up The charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power indicating the self-test mode. When applying power to the unit, all the LEDs will light up. Yellow will show up in the 25% LED for each bay; green for other LEDs. Then bay #1 will blink a binary representation of the firmware version (V09 = 1001). If the self-test is not evident: • • • •

5.8.5.3

Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed • • • • •

158

Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger. Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power. Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage. Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.

Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot. Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot. Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken). Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot. Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at power up.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

APPENDIX: PORT PINOUTS

APort Pinouts

A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4

Omnii Docking Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap Modules Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 Omnii Battery Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. A-3 .A-4 .A-5 .A-6

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

A-1

Appendix A: Port Pinouts Omnii Docking Connector

A.1

Omnii Docking Connector The docking interface on the base of the Omnii is custom-designed to dock with a device via an array of spring-mounted pins.

The following are the pin assignments of the interface. Table A.1

Docking Connector Pinout

Pin #

Signal

Pin #

Signal

GROUND

USB_OTG_P

DC_IN

USB_OTG_M

DOCK_LOW_PWR

CHARGE_IN

GROUND

USB_OTG_VBUS

DC_IN

CHARGE_IN

UART_RX

GROUND

DC_IN

UART_TX

USBH_P

CHARGE_DATA

USBH_M

GROUND

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

A-3

Appendix A: Port Pinouts Snap Modules Connectors

A.2

Snap Modules Connectors • •

Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): power and charge. Model ST4001 (USB Host/Client variant): power, charge, communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors, DC IN port. Model ST4005 (DE9M Serial variant): powered DE9M serial connector, power, charge, serial communications. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V 1A max power out and is defaulted to off.

•

ST4001

USB Micro B connector (USB device/ActiveSync)

ST4005

USB Type A connector (USB host)

Powered DE9M serial port

The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces. Table A.2

Snap Modules Connectors Pinout ST4001

USB Micro B Connector Pin #

A-4

ST4005 USB Type A Connector

Signal

Pin #

DE9M Serial Connector

Signal

Pin #

Signal

VBus

DCD

D-

RXD

D+

TXD

GROUND

DTR

GROUND

SHIELD

GROUND

SHIELD

DSR

RTS

CTS

5Vdc 1A power out

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix A: Port Pinouts Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002

A.3

Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or the power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For installation details, see “ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation” on page 153.

ST1002 Vehicle Cradle

44-pin connector

CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable

DE9M serial port

Power connector

USB Type A connectors (USB host)

The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces. Table A.3

CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Cable Connectors Pinout DE9M Serial

Pin #

USB Type A

Signal

Pin #

Power

Signal

Pin #

Signal

DCD

VBus

VIN (11.5 to 30Vdc)

RXD

D-

GND (not chassis ground)

TXD

D+

MOTION DETECT

DTR

DGROUND

MOTION DETECT RETURN (not ground)

GROUND

DSR

RTS

CTS

5Vdc 1A power out

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

A-5

Appendix A: Port Pinouts Omnii Battery Contacts

A.4

Omnii Battery Contacts Figure A.1

Battery Contact Pinout

765432

Table A.4

Battery Contact Pinout

Pin # 1

Signal Name BATT+

A-6

Description Positive lead of battery. Plastic Rip - provides mechanical polarity.

BATT+

Positive lead of battery.

BATT-CLK

SMBus data clock.

BATT-ID

Connected to GND in the battery.

BATT-DATA

SMBus bi-directional data line.

GND

Negative lead of battery.

GND

Negative lead of battery.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

APPENDIX: IMAGER & CAMERA SETTINGS

BImager & Camera Settings

B.1 Required Applets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.1 Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.2 Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2.2.1 Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . . . . . . B.2.2.2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . B.2.3 Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 Using the Imagers Applet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) . . . . . . . . B.3.1.1 Selecting a Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1.2 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1.4 Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1.6 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) B.3.2.1 Selecting a Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2.2 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2.4 Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2.6 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) . . B.3.3.1 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3.2 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3.3 Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3.4 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3.5 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4 Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.5 Filter Menu – Manipulating Barcode Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.5.1 Modifying a Barcode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.6 Translation Menu – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7.1 File Locations for Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7.2 Configuring Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. B-3 . B-3 . B-3 . B-3 .B-4 .B-4 .B-4 .B-5 .B-5 .B-5 .B-5 .B-6 .B-6 .B-6 . B-7 . B-7 .B-8 .B-8 .B-8 .B-9 .B-9 B-10 B-10 .B-11 .B-11 .B-11 B-12 B-13 B-13 B-13 B-13 B-14 B-15 B-15 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-1

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Required Applets

The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings. The principal uses of the application are to decode barcodes and to capture images. This imager services application is used for cameras and imagers to configure linear (1D), stacked linear, matrix (true 2D) and postal barcodes. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to “Demo” on page 39 for details.

B.1

Required Applets In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the Control Panel, along with the Imagers applet. Note: The Imagers icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed. To enable a newly-installed imager, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Enter/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.

B.2

Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Imagers applet: • •

Use a predefined preset. Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset. Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.

A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as barcode decoding or image capture. Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or resume from suspend. The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only specified barcodes, read only a specified number of barcodes or for reading unusual media. Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available: • Imaging for photo capture. • Imaging for barcode decoding. • Symbology selection. At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected active preset.

B.2.1

Predefined Presets Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient.

B.2.2

Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu) These presets encompass the majority of the most popular barcodes and their subtypes. The barcode decoding symbology predefined presets define which barcodes can be decoded. The barcode decoding camera predefined presets determine how the barcode images are captured.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-3

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu)

B.2.2.1

Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets The following presets select groups of similar barcodes for decoding. Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.

My Default This preset uses the Symbology Settings menu to define the preset. For details about the Symbology Settings menu, refer to “Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies” on page B-13. Factory Default This preset enables the decoding of frequently used barcodes. All This preset enables the decoding of all barcodes that the imager can decode. Linear This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode. Linear and PDF417 This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode. Matrix This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode. Postal This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode.

B.2.2.2

Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful barcode image capture in almost all conditions. Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.

Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux). Low Light This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain. Low Power This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the hand-held. Glossy Surface This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to read barcodes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.

B.2.3

Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions. Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.

Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux).

B-4

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Using the Imagers Applet

Motion This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion. Low Light Near This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash.

B.3

Using the Imagers Applet

B.3.1

Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows: • •

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Imagers icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the Imaging tab.

The following screen is displayed. Figure B.1

Imaging Menu

This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified as follows: • • •

B.3.1.1

Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’ read-only. Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’ read and write. One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as ‘A’ active.

Selecting a Camera To select a camera: • •

B.3.1.2

Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options. Choose a camera—specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.

Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right. To set an active preset: •

Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-5

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu)

B.3.1.3

Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset: • Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button. The associated preset window is displayed.

•

B.3.1.4

Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset: • Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button. A screen like the sample below is displayed.

• Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box. • Tap on OK to save your changes. The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.

B.3.1.5

Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value: •

B-6

Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

• • •

Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change. For a parameter that can take a range of values: - Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click on the parameter. - An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.

- Type a value in the field provided. • For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled: - Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values. • When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown. •

B.3.1.6

Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.

Removing a Custom Preset • Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset. •

B.3.2

Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) To configure the barcode decoding camera presets: • •

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Imagers. Tap on the Barcoding tab.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-7

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

Figure B.2

Camera Presets

Note: The top portion of the window displays the barcode decoding camera presets.

This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as follows: • • • •

B.3.2.1

Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review “Predefined Presets” on page B3. Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’ read-only. Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’ read and write. One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as ‘A’ active.

Selecting a Camera To select a camera: • •

B.3.2.2

Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options. Choose a camera—specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit.

Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.3 on page B-11, the active preset is Default. To set an active preset: •

B.3.2.3

Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.

Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset: • Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button. The associated preset window is displayed.

B-8

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu)

•

B.3.2.4

Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

B.3.2.5

Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-9

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

• • •

Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change. For a parameter that can take a range of values: - Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter. - An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.

- Type a value in the field provided. For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled: - Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values. • When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.

•

B.3.2.6

Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.

Removing a Custom Preset • Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset. •

B.3.3

Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.

Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) To configure the barcode decoding camera presets: •

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Imagers.

•

Tap on the Barcoding tab.

B-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

Figure B.3

Viewing Barcode Decoding Symbologies

Note: The bottom portion of the window displays the barcode decoding barcode presets.

B.3.3.1

Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.3 on page 11, the active preset is Default. To set an active preset: •

B.3.3.2

Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button.

Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset: • Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button. The associated preset window is displayed.

•

B.3.3.3

Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-11

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu)

B.3.3.4

Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button.

• • •

•

Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes.

B-12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies

B.3.3.5

Removing a Custom Preset • Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset. •

B.3.4

Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation.

Barcoding Menu – Configuring Symbologies To view the Symbology Settings options: • Tap on the Barcoding tab, highlight All and then double-tap the View button. To edit a default preset, you must first activate it: • Tap on My Default, and tap on the Activate button – an A appears to the right of My Default. Once the preset is activated, you can enable or disable the barcodes the imager will read. • Highlight My Default in the Barcoding tab. • Double-tap on the Edit button. None of the other barcode decoding predefined presets are changed.

B.3.4.1

Symbology Settings Note: For descriptions of the barcode symbologies, review “Barcode Symbologies” on page B16.

B.3.5

Filter Menu – Manipulating Barcode Data To configure rules for manipulating barcode data: • •

B.3.5.1

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Filter tab.

Modifying a Barcode Setting The rules for manipulating data from selected barcode symbologies can be modified. To change the settings for a symbology: • • •

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-13

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Translation Menu – Configuring Rules

•

B.3.6

- Type a value in the field provided. For a parameter that takes a single character: - Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter. The following screen is displayed:

When you’ve completed your edits, tap on OK.

Translation Menu – Configuring Rules Translation rules enable the automatic processing of barcode data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules. Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Scanner Control Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in either place affect both translation tables. • •

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translations tab.

For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to “Translations” on page 101.

B-14 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Advanced Menu

B.3.7

Advanced Menu

B.3.7.1

File Locations for Captured Images To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows: • •

Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab.

To define the location where imager files will be stored:

B.3.7.2

•

Tap on the File Location button.

• • •

Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type. Choose the Location in which your files will be saved. When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button.

Configuring Triggers Viewing the Trigger Configuration The trigger on the Omnii is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Imagers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet. • •

In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button. To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in the check box next to Show all modules.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-15

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Barcode Symbologies

Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on page 84.

B.4

Barcode Symbologies There are two sets of barcode symbologies, one for Imager and one for Color Camera. To display the barcodes available: • •

In the Imager & Camera Settings screen, go to the Barcoding tab. In the Camera Presets: drop-down menu at the top of the Imager & Camera Settings screen, choose Imager or Color Camera depending on which set of barcodes you want to work with.

•

Go to the Barcode Presets.

B-16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Imager Barcode Symbologies

•

B.4.1

Tap on an Barcode Preset to display the barcode symbologies.

Imager Barcode Symbologies The barcode symbologies for the Imager are listed in this section. Table B.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-E UPC-A UPC/EAN Sharing Settings Code 93 (disabled) MSI Plessey (disabled)

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-17

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

Table B.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies Code 11 (disabled) Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled) Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled) Telepen (disabled) Gs1 DataBar (disabled) TLC-39 (disabled) 2D PDF-417 2D micro PDF-417 CodaBlock F (disabled) CodaBlock A (disabled) 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode (disabled) 2D Aztec (disabled) Postal: PlanNET (disabled) Postal: PostNET (disabled) Postal: China (disabled) Postal: Japanese (disabled) Postal: Kix (disabled) Postal: Royal (disabled) Gs1

B.4.2

Color Camera Barcode Symbologies The barcode symbologies for the Color Camera are listed in this section. Table B.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-E UPC-A Code 93 (disabled) Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

B-18 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Color Camera Barcode Symbologies

Table B.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies Gs1 Composite 2D PDF-417 2D micro PDF-417 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode (disabled) 2D Aztec (disabled) Postal: PlanNET (disabled) Postal: PostNET (disabled) Postal: Australia (disabled) Postal: Canadian (disabled) Postal: Japanese (disabled) Postal: Kix (disabled) Postal: Korean (disabled) Postal: Royal (disabled)

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

B-19

APPENDIX: SCANNER SETTINGS

CScanner Settings

C.1

C.2

C.3 C.4

C.5

Barcode Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.1 Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) Data Options . . . Decoded (HHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decoded (Intermec ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.4.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . C.4.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . Non-Decoded Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.5.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. C-3 . C-3 . C-3 .C-4 .C-5 .C-5 .C-6 . C-7 . C-7 . C-7 .C-8 .C-9 C-10

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

C-1

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Barcode Settings

C.1

Barcode Settings The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner configurations and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize.

The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit. For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter E: “Omnii Specifications”. Important: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. For information on configuring the Options, Translations, and Ports settings, see “Scanners” on page 97.

C.1.1

Scanner Options The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held: Decoded (internal), Decoded (HHP), Decoded (Intermec ISCP, and Non-decoded Scanners.

The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always defer to your barcode scanner’s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter. Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel, under the System Properties tab.

Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘on’) only those codes that are required by the application. Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.

C.1.2

Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters. •

Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop up a menu.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

C-3

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (Internal) Scanners

•

Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.

To reset a single parameter to its default setting:

C.2

•

Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset.

•

Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting.

Decoded (Internal) Scanners

•

C-4

Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (internal).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Options

C.2.1

Options Note: Some options are available only for specific scanners. Refer to the option names in this section for scanner model identification. Dot Time (msec) The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec, 200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot. Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99. The value is measured in tenths of seconds.

C.2.2

Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options Scan Mode You can set the method of scanning by setting this parameter to Scan beam only, Aim with Scan: 1 trigger pull, Aim with Scan: 2 trigger pulls, Aim with Scan on trigger release, and Continuous Scan Mode. Default is Scan beam only. Aim Duration This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming-dot. Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off. Power Mode This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options: Continuous Power and Low Power. In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or serial communication. In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a suspend state, drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a barcode. Low Power Timeout To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned—a successful decode restores normal flashing. This is only used if the unit’s Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On. If the unit is used in a fixed mount this parameter might be used, but not if the unit is used as a hand-held. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min. or 3 min. Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the Omnii is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used. Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter barcodes. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

C-5

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (Internal) Data Options

Linear Security Level This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your barcode quality. There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4. Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded: Code Type

Length

Codabar

All

MSI Plessey

4 or less

D 5 of 5

8 or less

I 2 of 5

8 or less

Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded. Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times: Code Type

Length

MSI Plessey

4 or less

D 2 of 5

8 or less

I 2 of 5

8 or less

Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded. Bi-Direction Redundancy Note: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.

When this parameter is enabled, a barcode must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and reverse) before being decoded.

C.2.3

Decoded (Internal) Data Options Transmit Code ID Char A code ID character identifies the scanned barcode type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code: None, AIM or Symbol. Scan Data Format This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2] and [P] data [S1][S2]. Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] and Suffix [S2] A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing. When you doubletap on these parameters, dialog boxes are displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255.

C-6

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (HHP)

Delete Char Set ECIs Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECIs (Extended Channel Interpretations [also known as GLIs]) from its buffer before transmission. When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 barcodes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled. ECI Decoder Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs. If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data. The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table C.1. Table C.1 Decoded (Internal) Barcode Symbologies

C.3

Code 39

UPC/EAN Shared Settings

Trioptic Code (disabled)

Code 93 (disabled)

Code 128

Codabar (disabled)

EAN 13

MSI Plessey (disabled)

EAN 8

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

UPC-A

Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled)

UPC-E

Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

Decoded (HHP) To configure imagers, please see Appendix B: “Imager & Camera Settings”.

C.4

Decoded (Intermec ISCP)

•

C.4.1

Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP).

Decoded (ISCP) Options Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

C-7

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options

Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds.

C.4.2

Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down. Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off. Low Power Timeout To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned—a successful decode restores normal flashing. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, or 3 min. Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the unit is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used. Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter barcodes. Same Read Validate The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times. Same Read Timeout Prevents the same barcode from being read more than once. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec. Diff Read Timeout Prevents unwanted reading of other barcodes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec. Add AIM ID Prefix The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international barcode identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of the decoded barcode.

C-8

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Non-Decoded Scanners

The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table C.2. Table C.2 Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Barcode Symbologies Code 39

TLC-39 (disabled)

Code 128

2D PDF-417

EAN 13

2D micro PDF-417

EAN 8

Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)

UPC-A

Telepen (disabled)

UPC-E

Gs1 DataBar (disabled)

UPC/EAN Shared Settings

Composite

Code 93 (disabled)

TLC-39 (disabled)

Codabar (disabled)

PDF-417

MSI Plessey (disabled)

micro PDF-417 (disabled)

Code 11 (disabled)

CodaBlock F (disabled)

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

CodaBlock A (disabled)

Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled)

C.5

Non-Decoded Scanners Figure C.1

Non-Decoded Scanner Options

• Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Non-decoded. All the available barcode symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab. A ‘plus’ sign (+) to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub-menu of parameters is attached. • •

Tap on the + sign to display the sub-menu. To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter. If you need to type a value, a dialog box is displayed in which you can type a new value. If you need to change a yes or no value, double-tapping on the parameter toggles between yes and no. If you’re using the keyboard: • • •

Highlight the barcode you want to work with, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to highlight a parameter. To change a parameter value, press [SPACE] or the [RIGHT] arrow key. If a field requires text entry, a text box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

C-9

Appendix C: Scanner Settings Options

C.5.1

Options •

Tap on the + sign next to Options to display these parameters.

Dot Time (msec) The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 3000. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot. Short Code When enabled, this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 barcodes (2 characters). When disabled, these short barcodes are rejected. Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand-held must decode more potential barcodes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose barcodes with 4 or more characters. Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode, prior to a barcode being accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a barcode but also improve the reliability of the decoded barcode. Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge barcodes (Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the barcode. The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting. The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table C.3. Table C.3 Non-Decoded Barcode Symbologies Code 39

Code 93 (disabled)

Code 128

Code 11 (disabled)

EAN 13

Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)

EAN 8

MSI Plessey (disabled)

UPC-A

Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)

UPC-E

IATA 2 of 5 (disabled)

Codabar (disabled)

C-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

INTERNAL IMAGER & SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS

DInternal Imager & Scanner Specifications

D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.5 D.6 D.7 D.8 D.9 D.10

SE955 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.1.1 SE955 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . SE965 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.2.1 SE965 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . . . D.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones . . . . . . SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner . . . . D.4.1 SE1524ER Decode Zones . . . . . . EV15 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . D.6.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances . . EA20X Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.7.1 EA20X Typical Reading Distances . HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder. . . . . . . . . D.8.1 HHP 5080SR Working Range . . . SE4500SR – Standard Range Imager. . . . . D.9.1 SE4500SR Decode Zone . . . . . . SE4600LR – Long Range Imager . . . . . . . D.10.1 SE4600LR Decode Zones . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. D-3 . D-3 D-4 .D-5 D-6 D-6 . D-7 . D-7 D-8 D-8 D-9 D-9 D-10 D-10 .D-11 .D-11 D-12 D-13 D-14 D-15

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-1

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE955 Scanner

This appendix lists specifications for the following internal scanners. For a current list of model numbers and descriptions for the Omnii scanner pod and back cover kits, please contact your Psion representative or go to http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm.

D.1

SE955 Scanner Parameter

D.1.1

SE955

Configuration

Decoded

Scan Rate

104 (± 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)

Scan Angle

47º± 3º default / 35º ± 3º reduced

Voltage

3.0-3.6 V± 10%; 5 V± 10%

Ambient Light:

10,000 ft. candles

Laser Safety

IEC 60825

Electrical Safety

UL 60950, EN/IEC 60950

EMI/RFI

FCC Part 15 Class B, EN 55024/CISPR 22, AS 3548, VCCI

Environmental

RoHS Compliant

SE955 Decode Zones

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-3

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE965 Scanner

D.2

SE965 Scanner Parameter

SE965

Dimensions

0.46 in. H x 0.85 in. W x 0.61 in. D 11.75 mm H x 21.6 mm W x 15.5 mm D

Weight

0.27 oz./7.6 g

Configuration

Decoded

Interface

SSI Control over TTL Serial on a 12-pin ZIF connector

Scan Angle

Wide (default): 47 ° (typical) Medium: 35° (typical) Narrow: 10° (typical) Note: The SE965 scan engine does not require margin on either side of the barcode to decode. The 47° scan line provides identical scanning performance to older scan engines with a scan line of 53°.

D-4

Skew Tolerance

± 40° from normal

Pitch Tolerance

± 65° from normal

Roll Tolerance

± 35° from vertical

Specular Dead Zone

± 8°

Optical Resolution

0.005 in. minimum element width

Scan Repetition Rate

104 (± 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)

Print Contrast

Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm

Ambient Lighting Tolerance

Tolerant to typical artificial indoor and natural outdoor (direct sunlight) lighting conditions. Fluorescent, Incandescent, Mercury Vapor, Sodium Vapor, LED5. 450 Ft Candles (4,844 Lux) Sunlight 8000 Ft Candles (86,111 Lux)

Operating Temperature

-22° F to 140° F/ -30° C to 60° C

Storage Temperature

-40° F to 158° F/ -40° C to 70° C

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE965 Decode Zones

D.2.1

SE965 Decode Zones

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-5

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner

D.3

SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner Parameter

D.3.1

D-6

SE1224HP

Type

Laser Class 2

Light Source

Visible Laser Diode 650 nm

Scan Rate

35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional)

Scan Angle/Field of View

42º (typical), 30º (narrow)

Scan Patterns

Linear

Minimum Print Contrast

Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm.

Symbologies

UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.

Programmable Parameters

Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.

Ambient Light

Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4844 Lux). Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles (86112 Lux).

Laser Output Power (peak)

1.35 mW

SE1224HP Decode Zones

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner

D.4

SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner Parameter

D.4.1

Specification

Type

Laser Class 2

Light Source

Visible Laser Diode 650 nm

Scan Rate

35 (±5) scans/sec (bi-directional).

Scan Angle/Field of View

13.5° ±0.7°

Scan Patterns

Linear

Minimum Print Contrast

Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm.

Symbologies

UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC.EAN128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.

Programmable Parameters

Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.

Ambient Light

Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux) Sunlight: 4,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).

Laser Output Power (peak)

1.26 mW

SE1524ER Decode Zones SE1524ER Decode Zone A (Short Range, Small Codes)

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-7

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications EV15 Imager

SE1524ER Decode Zone B (Long Range, Large Codes)

D.5

EV15 Imager Parameter

D.5.1

Specification

Light Source

617 nm highly visible LED

Scan Angle

40º

Minimum Print Contrast

Minimum 25%

Minimum X. Dimension

0.1 mm (4 mils)

Reading Distance

Up to 90 cm (35 in)

Symbologies

UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417, Micro PDF417

Ambient Light

Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux

EV15 Imager Decode Zone

0 Lux to 100,000 Lux Minimum Range Inches

Mil Size 5

2.5

UPC

14.5

2.5

35.5

High quality symbols in normal room light.

D-8

Maximum Range Inches

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications EA11 Decoded 2D Imager

D.6

EA11 Decoded 2D Imager Parameter

D.6.1

Specification

Scan Rate

2D mode: 56 images/s auto adaptive

Linear Emulation Mode

200 scans/s auto adaptive

Scan Angle

38.9° (horizontal), 25.4° (vertical)

Optical Resolution

752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels

Print Contrast

down to 25%

Versions

Standard range

Symbologies - 1D

EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post)

Symbologies - 2D

Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codes

Voltage (optics)

3.3V -5% / +10% (typical values)

Operating Current

170mA - 310mA (lighting condition dependent)

Power Saving Mode

2mA

Ambient Light

Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux

Regulatory Approvals

UL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant

EA11 Typical Reading Distances

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-9

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications EA20X Imager

D.7

EA20X Imager Parameter

Specification

Light Source

617nm highly visible LED, 650nm laser framing/aiming

Scan Rate

2D mode: 60 images/s auto adaptive

Linear Emulation Mode

200 scans/s auto adaptive

Scan Angle

26.0° (horizontal), 16.8° (vertical)

Framing Angles

25.0° (horizontal), 16.0° (vertical)

Optical Resolution

752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels

Print Contrast

down to 30% on 1D, 35% on 2D

Minimum Resolution

1D symbologies 0.15 mm (6 mil), Stacked (PDF417) 0.17 (6.6 mil) and 2D matrix 0.18 (7mil)

Symbologies - 1D

Symbologies - 2D Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codes

D.7.1

Voltage

3.3V± 5%

Operating Current

410mA @ 3.3V scanning with power save

Power Saving Mode

7mA

Ambient Light

From 0 to 100,000 lux

Regulatory Approvals

UL, cUL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant, Class 2 Laser

EA20X Typical Reading Distances

D-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder

D.8

HHP 5080SR Imager/Decoder Parameter

Specification

Focal Point - SR

7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate

Image Sensor

752 x 480 CMOS sensor

Motion Tolerance

4 inches per second

Rotational Sensitivity

360°

Viewing Angle

±40°

Ambient Light

Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)

Illumination LEDs

626 nm ± 30 nm

Aiming

LEDs: 526 nm ± 30 nm Laser: 650 nm ± 10 nm

Input Voltage - Imager

3.3 VDC ± 5% (23°C)

Input Voltage - HHP 5080

3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23°C)

Current Draw - Imager

Max. Operating Current: 100 mA; Standby Current: 100 µA

Current Draw - HHP 5080

Average Current (Interlaced Mode): 510 mA; Standby Current: 120 µA ; Peak: 600 mA

Symbologies: 2 Dimensional

D.8.1

PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code, Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite

Linear

Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2 of 5, Reduced Space Symbology, Code 93, Codablock

Postal

Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post, Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post

HHP 5080SR Working Range Data is characterized at 23°C (73.4°F) and 0 lux ambient light. Symbology

Size (mil)

Near

Far

Linear

8.3 (.020cm)

3.5 in. (8.9cm)

7.6 in. (19.3cm)

PDF417

10 (.025cm)

3.1 in. (7.9cm)

9 in. (22.9cm)

UPC

13 (.033cm)

2.1 in. (5.3cm)

13.2 in. (33.5cm)

Data Matrix

15 (.038cm)

2.3 in. (5.8cm)

10.2 in. (25.9cm)

15 (.038cm)

3.1 in. (7.9cm)

8.8 in. (22.4cm)

MaxiCode

35 (.089cm)

2.0 in. (5.1cm)

13.0 in. (33cm)

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-11

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE4500SR – Standard Range Imager

D.9

SE4500SR – Standard Range Imager Parameter Power Requirements - Input Voltage

Specification 3.3 V ± 0.3 V at 23° C

Operating Mode Supply Currents (3.3VDC at 23° C): Low Power 500 µA Idle

18 mA

Image Acquisition

80 mA

Illumination Enabled

200 mA

Maximum Operating Current 250 mA (aiming on during exposure, illumination enabled) Maximum Sensor Power Supply 100 mVp-p (3.3 V, 10 Hz - 100 kHz) for decoding Noise* (at 23° C)

Optical Resolution Specular Dead Zone: Illumination On Illumination Off

Skew Tolerance Pitch Angle Roll Ambient Light Immunity (Sunlight) Imaging Sensor: Image Resolution Grey Scale Field of View (FOV)

30 mVp-p (3.3 V, 10 Hz - 100 kHz) for image capture 5.0 mil (Code 39), 6.7 mil (PDF417) Up to 20º depending on target distance and substrate glossiness None

± 60º ± 60º 360º 9000 ft. candles (96,900 lux)

752 H x 480 V pixels (Wide VGA) 256 levels (8 bits per pixel) SE4500-SR: 39.6º horizontal, 25.7º vertical

Focusing Distance from Front 8 in. / 20.3 cm of Engine (SR) Aiming Element: 655 ± 10 nm Visible Laser Diode (VLD) Central Dot Optical Power Pattern Angle

0.6 mW (typical) 40º horizontal, 30º vertical

Illumination System: LEDs Pattern Angle

Shock

625 ± 5 nm (dominant wavelength) 60º x 40º at 80% center intensity 2000 G ± 5% applied via any mounting surface at -30º and 55º C for a period of 0.85 ± 0.05 msec 2500 G ± 5% applied via any mounting surface at 23º C for a period of 0.85 ± 0.05 msec

Vibration

Unpowered SE4500 withstands a random vibration along each of the X, Y, and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis (6 G rms), defined as follows:

20 to 80 Hz Ramp up at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave 80 to 350 Hz 0.04 G2/Hz 350 Hz to 2 kHzRamp down at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave ESD ± 2 kV @ connector Laser Safety Class CDRH / IEC Class 2 LED Class IEC Class 1M Maximum Engine Dimensions 11.8 mm H x 21.50 mm W x 16.3 mm D Weight Electrical Interface

0.46 in. H x 0.85 in.W x 0.64 in. D 8.0 grams (0.28 oz) 21 pin 0.3 mm pitch ZIF connector

D-12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE4500SR Decode Zone

D.9.1

SE4500SR Decode Zone in.

22.9

4.5 11.4

SE4500-SR

4.5 11.4

5 mil Code 39 7.5 2.1 6.67 mil PDF417 7.1 3.4 7.5 mil Code 39

15 mil PDF417

* 2.8

15 mil Data Matrix

0 0

15.5 14.7 12.4

20 mil Code 39

5 12.7

22.9

F i e l d

10.1

13 mil (100% UPC)

1.6

In. cm

o f

10.6

10 mil PDF417

W i d t h

10 25.4

15 38.1

24.7

20 50.8

25 63.5

Depth of Field

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-13

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE4600LR – Long Range Imager

D.10

SE4600LR – Long Range Imager Parameter

Specification

Input Voltages VCC VCC_INTFC VCC_ILLUM VCC_SENSOR

3.3 V ±10%, 75 mA max 1.8 V ±10% or 3.3 V ±10%, 30 mA max 3.0 V - 8.4 V, 800 mA

3.3 V ±10%, 70 mA max VCC=VCC_SENSOR=VCC_INTFC =3.3 V VCC_ILLUM=5.0 V Operating Mode Supply Cur- Low Power rents (Average) 750 µA Low Power 750 µA Idle Aim enabled, no illumination 20 mA or image acquisition Image Acquisition 70 mA Illumination Enabled Illumination and Aim Enabled

80 mA 550 mA 600 mA Maximum Sensor Power Supply 40 mV p-p (10 Hz - 50 KHz) and Noise* (VCC_SENSOR) 100 mV p-p (50KHz - 100 KHz) for bar code decoding Optical Resolution

30 mV p-p (10 Hz - 100 KHz) for image capture Near sensor: 5 mil (Code 39), 10 mil (Data Matrix) Far sensor: 15 mil (Code 39), 35 mil (Data Matrix)

Specular Dead Zone: Illumination On Illumination Off

Skew Tolerance Pitch Angle Roll Ambient Light Immunity (Sunlight) Imaging Sensor: Image Resolution Grey Scale Field of View (FOV)

Up to 20º depending on target distance and substrate glossiness None

± 60º ± 60º 360º 9000 ft. candles (96,900 lux)

752 H x 480 V pixels (wide VGA) 256 levels (8 bits per pixel) SE4600LR Far System: 11.6º horizontal, 7.4º vertical SE4600LR Near System: 13º horizontal, 8.3º vertical

Aiming Element: Visible Laser Diode (VLD) Aiming Dot Optical Power

655 ±5 nm (dominant wavelength) 0.6 mW (typical)

Illumination System: LEDs Pattern Angle

Shock

625 ± 5 nm (dominant wavelength) 16º horizontal x 11.5º vertical 2000 G ± 5% in the direction of any of the six principal axes applied via the mounting surface at -20º and 55º C for a period of 0.85 ± 0.1 msec 2500 G ± 5% in the direction of any of the six principal axes applied via the mounting surface at 23º C for a period of 0.70 ± 0.07 msec

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-14

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE4600LR Decode Zones

Parameter Vibration

ESD Laser Safety Class LED Class Temperature: Operating Storage

Specification Unpowered SE4600LR withstands a random vibration along each of the X, Y, and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis (6 G rms), defined as follows:

20 to 80 Hz

Ramp up at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave

80 to 350 Hz

0.04 G2/Hz

350 Hz to 2 kHz Ramp down at 0.04 G2/Hz at 3 dB/octave ± 2 kV @ connector CDRH / IEC Class 2 IEC Class -20º to 55º C (-4º to 131º F) -40º to 70º C (-40º to 158ºF) (-30º C (22º F) for Omnii XT15f Arctic variant)

Humidity: Operating) Storage

95% RH, non-condensing at 55º C

85% RH, non-condensing at 70º C Maximum Engine Dimensions 38.23 mm W x 19.34 mm H x 27.00 mm D Weight Electrical Interface

1.51 in. W x 0.76 in. H x 1.06 in. D 45 - 52 grams (1.59 - 1.83 oz) 27 pin 0.3 mm pitch ZIF connector

NOTE: Environmental and/or tolerance parameters are not cumulative. A thermal analysis is recommended if the application is subject to an extreme temperature environment.

D.10.1

SE4600LR Decode Zones

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-15

Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE4600LR Decode Zones

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

D-16

APPENDIX: OMNII SPECIFICATIONS

EOmnii Specifications

E.1

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1.2 Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.2 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) . . . . . . . . . . . E.3 Wireless Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.3.1 Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . . . . . . . . . E.3.2 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio E.3.3 Model RA2070 802.11a/b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.3.4 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. E-3 . E-3 . E-4 . E-5 . E-6 . E-6 . E-7 . E-9 E-10

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

E-1

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545)

E.1

The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) Note: For Omnii freezer unit hardware specifications, please go to Appendix F: “Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants”.

Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.

E.1.1

Hardware Physical Dimensions • Width: • Depth:

• Weight:

At display: 100 mm (3.94 in) At docking connector: 45 mm (1.77 in) At display: 44 mm (1.73 in) At docking connector: 45 mm (1.77 in) At grip area: 31 mm (1.22 in) Basic unit with battery: 610g (1.34 lb) With battery, high visibility display, camera, Push-To-Talk speaker, EV15 1D imager: 636g (1.40 lb)

Processor and Memory • Texas Instruments® Sitara AM37xx, ARM Processor 800 MHz (OMAP3® compatible) • RAM: 512 MB • Flash ROM: 1 GB Operating System • Microsoft Windows® Embedded CE 6.0 User Interface • Colour/Touch Display:

• Keyboards:

• Indicators and Controls: • Side Buttons: • Voice, Audio & Feedback:

Power Management • Battery Pack:

9.4 cm (3.7 in) diagonal. VGA (640 x 480) Transflective. High Visibility option: superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd/m2 brightness. Extreme Duty option: withstands 1.25 Joule impact, superior low temperature operation (to -20° C/-4° F), with 160 cd/m2 brightness. Better abrasion resistance. High reliability keypad ultra-white backlight. Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats. See http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld.htm for a list of available configurations. Four multi-colour LEDs indicate the status of the battery, application, radio, and scanner. Volume, Scan, Enter, Vertical Scroll. High volume beeper: 95 dBA. Integrated Microphone and speaker. Optional Push-to-Talk speaker. Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk – VoIP over Wi-Fi or WWAN. Vibration feedback.

5000 mAh high capacity Lithium-ion (for battery specifications, see “Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)” on page E-5).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

E-3

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Regulatory Approvals

Expansion Ports • MicroSD slot for Flash expansion (up to 32 GB). • Multiple Internal Multi-Function Expansion Interfaces with: - TTL serial - USB host - GPI0 Camera (optional) • Colour. • 3 Megapixel. • Autofocus. • 4x digital zoom. • Dual LED flash. • Video capable. Enhanced Features • 3 axis accelerometer. • GPS. • Compass. Environmental • Operating Temperature: • Storage Temperature: • Humidity: • ESD: • Omnii RT15

• Omnii XT15

E.1.2

-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F) -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F) 5% to 95% RH non-condensing. +/- 8 kV contact, +/- 15 kV air discharge. Drop Durability: 1.5 m (5 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accessories); multiple 1.8 m (6 ft.) drops to polished concrete. Rain And Dust Resistance: IEC 60529, classification IP65. Drop Durability: 1.7 m (5.6 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accessories); multiple 2.0 m (6.5 ft.) drops to polished concrete. Rain And Dust Resistance: IEC 60529, classification IP67.

Regulatory Approvals • Woldwide Safety, EMC, RF, Laser approvals • CE Mark • E Mark (vehicle cradles) • RoHS compliant • WEEE compliant • REACH compliant

E-4

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001)

E.2

Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3001) For safety instructions, please see “Lithium-ion Battery Safety Precautions” in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191). Parameter

Specification

Model Number

ST3001

Chemistry

lithium-ion (Li-Ion)

Capacity

5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20°C to 3.0 V (min)

Voltage

3.7 V nominal (2.75 V min. to 4.2 V max.)

Cell Configuration

1 S2P (2 parallel connected cells)

Max. Charge Voltage

4.2 V +/- 1%

Recommended Charge Termination Timeout

5.0 hr - charging must stop.

Charge Temperature

0°C to +40°C (32°F to +104°F)

Discharge Temperature

-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)

Storage Temperature

-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122ºF). Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended. 25°C (77ºF)—recommended storage temperature.

Cycle Life

300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70% of nominal capacity based on 0.5C charge / 0.5C discharge rates (to 3.0 V) @ 23°C (73.4ºF).

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

E-5

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Wireless Radios

E.3

Wireless Radios

E.3.1

Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio Parameter

E-6

Specification

Manufacturer

Cinterion, Model MC75i

Form Factor

Quad-Band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 MHz EDGE (E-GPRS) multi-slot class 12 GPRS multi-slot class 12 GSM release 99

Output Power

Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM850 Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM900 Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1800 Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1900

Control via AT Commands

Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005

Supply Voltage Range

3.2 to 4.3 V

EDGE Data Transmission

EDGE class 12: max 236.8 kbps (downlink) Mobile station class B Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1-9

GPRS Data Transmission

GPRS class 12 Mobile station class B PBCCH support Coding schemes CS 1-4

CSD Data Transmission

Up to 14.4 kbps, V.110 Non-transparent mode

SMS

Point-to-point MO and MT Text and PDU mode

Voice

Triple-rate codec for HR, FR, and EFR Adaptive multi-rate AMR Basic hands-free operation Echo cancellation Noise reduction

Interfaces

Hirose U.FL-R-SMT 50 ohm antenna connector Antenna solder pad Molex 80-pin board-to-board connector: Power supply Audio: 2x analog, 1x digital Serial interface (ITU-T V.24 protocol) SIM card interface 3 V, 1.8 V

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio

E.3.2

Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio Table E.1 Parameter

Specifications

General Frequency bands

GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900MHz UMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/900/1900/2100MHz

GSM class

Small MS

Output power (according to Release 99)

Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM850 Class 4 (+33dBm ±2dB) for EGSM900 Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1800 Class 1 (+30dBm ±2dB) for GSM1900 Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 850 8-PSK Class E2 (+27dBm ± 3dB) for GSM 900 8-PSK Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSK Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSK Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 2100, WCDMA FDD Bd I Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 1900,WCDMA FDD Bd II Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 900, WCDMA FDD Bd VIII Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 850, WCDMA FDD Bd V Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 800, WCDMA FDD Bd VI

HSPA features 3GPP Release 6, 7

DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7Mbps UE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supported Compressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP TS25.212

UMTS features 3GPP Release 4

PS data rate - 384 kbps DL / 384 kbps UL CS data rate - 64 kbps DL / 64 kbps UL

GSM/GPRS/EGPRS features Data transfer

GPRS: • Multislot Class 10 • Full PBCCH support • Mobile Station Class B • Coding Scheme 1 - 4 EGPRS: • Multislot Class 10 • EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK • Downlink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9 • Uplink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9 • SRB loopback and test mode B • 8-bit, 11-bit RACH • PBCCH support • 1 phase/2 phase access procedures • Link adaptation and IR • NACC, extended UL TBF • Mobile Station Class B CSD: • V.110, RLP, non-transparent • 14.4kbps • USSD

SMS

Point-to-point MT and MO

GPS features Protocol

NMEA

Modes

Assisted GPS (control plane AGPS, E911)

General

Power saving modes GPS tracking in parallel to 2G/3G diversity operation

Software AT commands

Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005, and proprietary Cinterion Wireless Modules commands

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

E-7

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio

Table E.1 Parameter

Specifications

SIM Application Toolkit

SAT Release 99

Audio

Audio speech codecs GSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR 3GPP: AMR Speakerphone operation, echo cancellation, noise suppression

Interfaces Antenna

50Ohms. Main GSM/UMTS antenna, UMTS diversity antenna, GPS antenna (active/passive)

USB

USB 2.0 High Speed (480Mbit/s) device interface

UICC interface

Supported chip cards: UICC/SIM/USIM 3V, 1.8V

Special features

E-8

Phonebook

SIM and phone

Antenna

SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) / DARP (Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance) RX diversity type 3i

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Model RA2070 802.11a/b/g/n Radio

E.3.3

Model RA2070 802.11a/b/g/n Radio Parameter

Sub-parameter

Specification

Manufacturer

Model RA2070 (Murata, LBEH1Z9PFC)

Form Factor

Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm * This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio

Antenna Port

Antenna Type

Antenna Gain

Transmit Power

Frequency Range

Channels

RX Sensitivity

Data Rates

EVM

Bluetooth Coexistence

802.11b/g/n

U.FL jack. Non-diversity. Multiplexed between 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) and Bluetooth radio

802.11a/n

U.FL jack. Non-diversity.

802.11b/g/n

PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ Network and Dial-up Connections.

•

Choose the radio icon representing the radio you want to set up—in the sample screen in Figure H.4, this is labelled as SDIO86861

Figure H.4 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings Window

H.1.1

Wireless Statistics When you choose the Wireless LAN icon, an 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings window is displayed. This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items—Packets IN, Packets OUT, IN errors and OUT errors.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

H-3

Appendix H: Wireless Zero Config Settings Wireless Information

Figure H.5 Wireless Statistics

H.1.2

Wireless Information This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network. • •

Configure button: To change the settings in an existing network, highlight the network you want to modify, and tap on the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box. Connect button: To force connection to a specific, existing network, highlight the network to which you want the Omnii to connect, and tap on the Connect button.

Figure H.6 Wireless Information

This tab lists available networks—any access points that are broadcasting an SSID, and it lists preferred networks—networks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here. By default, the Omnii attempts to connect to preferred networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to non-preferred networks in the Advanced dialog box (see Figure H.9). •

H-4

To add a new configuration, tap on the Add New button. A blank Wireless Properties dialog box is displayed.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix H: Wireless Zero Config Settings Wireless Information

Wireless Properties Figure H.7

•

Wireless Properties

Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the Network name (SSID): dialog box. The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network.

Important: Keep in mind that the Omnii will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID. •

•

Ad Hoc And Infrastructure: If you are using an Infrastructure network—one in which the hand-helds must pass data through an access point—leave the check box next to This is an ad hoc network blank. If you are using an Ad Hoc network—a network in which the hand-helds pass data directly to other Ad Hoc devices without an access point—add a checkmark in the check box next to This is an ad hoc network to enable Ad Hoc. Encryption: WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose Disabled from the drop-down encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a standard for protecting data through encryption. AES supports key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a replacement for the Data Encryption Standard (DES), which has a key size of 56 bits. In addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes, the AES algorithm is a symmetrical block cipher that can encrypt (encipher) and decrypt (decipher) information. Authentication: 802.11 supports several subtypes of network authentication services: Open, Shared, WPA, and WPA-PSK. Under Open authentication, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station. Under Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. Under WPA and WPA-PSK authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is required. For wireless networks without a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and RADIUS is supported. Network Key: This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point. To assign a Network key, highlight The key is provided automatically, and uncheck the check box to disable this option.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

H-5

Appendix H: Wireless Zero Config Settings Assigning An IP Address

Figure H.8 Network Key and Key Index

• •

•

H.2

Key Index: This field is used to identify the WEP key. Enter a value from 1 to 4. Enable 802.1x authentication: 802.1X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS or MD5 encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802.1X standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed in the drop-down menu next to the EAP option. To activate 802.1X, highlight 802.1x authentication, and check the check box. EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol): This drop-down menu lists the EAP types available on your system. The items in this drop-down menu will vary depending on your network setup. Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate. By selecting the Properties button, you will be able to select a Certificate. “Compass” on page 66 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network. Saving and exiting the radio setup: Once you’ve completed the configuration, press [Enter], or tap on OK. The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network. The radio will search for the SSID and compare the WEP and authentication information you specified. If there is a match between the hand-held settings and the access point settings, the hand-held will communicate on the network through the access point.

Assigning An IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. Refer to “IP Address” on page 128 for details about assigning an IP address.

H.2.1

Name Server Refer to “Name Server” on page 129 for details about this option.

H-6

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Appendix H: Wireless Zero Config Settings Advanced Features

H.3

Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box: • Tap on the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab. (Refer to Figure H.6.) This window lists the available preferred networks. Figure H.9 Advanced Wireless Settings

H.3.1

Rearranging Preferred Networks The Omnii attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networks—move networks up and down in the list: • •

H.3.2

Tap in the Networks List, and highlight the network that you want to move up or down in the list. To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, tap on the Up or Down button.

Deleting A Preferred Network To delete a network from this list: • •

H.3.3

In the preferred networks list, highlight the network you want to remove. Tap on the Delete button.

Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network: • • •

Highlight the network that you want to modify. Tap on the Properties button. Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box, and press [Enter] to save the changes.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

H-7

APPENDIX: OMNII XT15NI NON-INCENDIVE SAFETY GUIDELINES

IOmnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines

I.1 I.2

Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-3 Omnii XT15ni Battery Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-4

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

I-1

Appendix I: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information

I.1

Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Important Safety & Regulatory Information The Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) Hand-Held Computer has been qualified by UL LLC to the requirements of the USA and Canada for use in Class I, Division 2-Groups A, B, C and D T6 environments. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Psion Inc. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Psion Inc., may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the user's authority to operate the equipment. Warning:

This mark indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use.

Warning:

Ce marquage indique que l'usager doit, avant l'utilisation, lire toute la documentation incluse.

Warning:

Explosion Hazard-Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 locations.

Warning:

This unit has NO OPERATOR REPLACEABLE PARTS other than the battery pack. Disassembly/assembly of the Omnii XT15ni must be performed by trained Psion service personnel at a Psion service depot. No unauthorized substitution of parts is allowed for the Omnii XT15ni hand-held.

Warning:

Use ONLY the Psion Model ST3001-NI battery pack in the Omnii XT15ni. No substitutions are permitted without authorization from Psion personnel.

Warning:

DO NOT CHARGE OR CHANGE BATTERIES in an area that is known to be hazardous. Replace batteries in an area known to be non-hazardous.

Warning:

EXPLOSION HAZARD. DO NOT REMOVE OR REPLACE LAMPS, FUSES OR PLUG-IN MODULES (AS APPLICABLE) UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE FREE OF IGNITIBLE CONCENTRATIONS OF FLAMMABLE GASES OR VAPORS.

Warning:

EXPLOSION HAZARD. DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE THE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE FREE OF IGNITIBLE CONCENTRATIONS.

Warning:

Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of materials used in the following devices: battery packs, housings, LCDs, touchscreens, keypads. Replacement of modules, housings, keypads, LCDs or touchscreens, end-caps, pods or external connectors must only be performed at an authorized Psion service centre.

Warning:

The battery pack used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat above 100°C (+212°F) or incinerate. Dispose of used battery packs promptly. Keep away from children.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

I-3

Appendix I: Omnii XT15ni Non-Incendive Safety Guidelines Omnii XT15ni Battery Information

Warning:

I.2

I-4

The following additional warnings and cautions must be observed for the safety of the operator and others in potentially hazardous locations: The Omnii XT15ni must only be used when the ambient temperature is between -20°C and +50°C (-4°F and +122°F). The Omnii XT15ni may NOT be connected to any of its available accessories while in potentially hazardous locations. This includes anything that uses the communications docking connector, headset, or microphone jacks. All allowed connections must be made while outside of the potentially hazardous location. The use of Compact Flash, Secure Digital, and SIM Cards in the Omnii XT15ni while in potentially hazardous locations is permitted as long as these cards are not removed or changed while in the hazardous location. Any connector cover removed while in ordinary locations must be reinstalled before entering a potentially hazardous location.

Omnii XT15ni Battery Information Warning:

The Omnii XT15ni hand-held operates with a specially adapted battery, model number ST3001-NI.

Warning:

The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100°C (212°F). Charge ONLY with Psion Model ST3001-NI. Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Use ONLY Psion battery pack Model ST3001-NI. Risk of fire or explosion if incorrect battery pack is used. Promptly dispose of used battery pack according to the instructions..

Warning:

Le block-plies utilisé dans cet appareil peut prendre feu, constituer un risque de brûlure chimique, exploser ou dégager des substances toxiques s'il est manipulé de façon inappropriée. Ne pas jeter au feu, démonter ou chauffer à plus de 100°C (212°F). Ne charger qu'avec les dispositifs Psion ST3001-NI. Ne pas court-circuiter; cela pourrait causer des brûlures. Garder hors de la portée des enfants. N'utiliser que le modèle de bloc-plies Psion ST3001-NI. L'utilisation d'un mauvais blocplies pourrait constituer un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Mettre rapidement au rebut tout bloc-plies usé, conformément aux instructions.

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

Numbers

1D internal scanner 33, 34 2D imager 34 34-key freezer keyboard F-5 36-key keyboard alpha keys, accessing 26 uppercase letters, creating 27 58-key freezer keyboard F-5 7545 freezer models See Omnii XT15f F-3 7545 Model See Omnii E-3 802.11a/b/g/n radio E-9 configuring 123–130

accessories carrying case 137 desktop docking stations 142 Ethernet cable 147 hand strap 136, 137 holster, hard shell 137 pistol grip 135 quad docking station 146 vehicle cradle 149 Active Remote Configuration (A.R.C.) 131 AC Wall adaptor 140 Administrator Password (PsionVU settings) 93 AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) 74 Aim Duration C-5 aiming dot, duration of C-5, C-10 ALT Key 23 appearance (display colour scheme) 68 appending to barcodes characters 100 App Launch Keys 55 approvals, Omnii (including scanner) E-4 arrow keys moving the cursor 23 AT Terminal, WWAN G-14 audio indicators adjusting volume 31 description of beep conditions 31 AutoRestore 113

background, choosing for Desktop 95 background image (display scheme) 68 backlight display 68 intensity 27 Backspace (DEL Key) 23 backup Profile (Total Recall) AutoRestore 113 Clone to USB 114 creating 111 Restore 113 restoring 113 Upload to A.R.C. 114 viewing 113 backups, managing profiles 113 Bad Scan Vibrates 101 barcode appending to 100 decodes required C-10 decoding edge-to-edge C-10 Decoding symbology predefined presets B-3 displaying type of barcode 100 parameters 98, C-3 Security C-10 Translation tab 101 barcode reader

integrated scanner, operation of 32 bar code symbologies color camera B-17, B-18 imager B-17 battery 21 Advanced dialog box 90 Battery Health dialog box 90 Built-in Devices dialog box 90 capacity dialog box 88 charger safety instructions 141 charging 14, 21, 141 charging with desktop docking station 144 contact pinout A-6 estimated battery backup time 89 installing 14 power saving suspend dialog box 88 replacing 14 specifications E-5 specifications, Arctic ST3002 F-7 ST3006 6-slot battery charger 156–158 Suspend Threshold dialog box 89 swap time 21 taskbar icon 30 Baud, port replicator 104 beeper adjusting volume 31 description of beep conditions 31 Bi-Direction Redundancy C-6 Bluetooth radio devices, pairing 59 GPRS setup 62 ISM band 56 radio configuration 56–65 setup 56 specifications E-10 Boot to BooSt 16 Bright For (backlight) 69

cable diagrams A-1 calibrating touchscreen 27, 109 Call Lists 119 Call Management 119 camera specifications E-4 camera settings 75 case, carrying 137 Certificates 65 chargers 141 desktop docking station 142 indicators 144 installing at a site 141 operation 144 operator controls 141 safety instructions 141 Snap Modules 138 ST4004 operator controls 147 ST4004 quad docking station 146 troubleshooting 148 Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-6 PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ radio specifications E-7 clean start 16 Click Data (scanner double-click) 100 Click Time (scanner double-click) 100 clone (Total Recall) 112 Clone to USB 114 Codepage 101 Command Prompt 38 communication Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

Ethernet connection (quad docking station) 147 Compass 66 computer hardware properties 110 conference calls, creating 119 Continuous Scan Mode C-8 Control Panel accessing 51 App Launch Keys icon 55 applications list 52 Display Properties 68 keyboard properties 77 power management properties 88 Predefined presets B-3 Quick Defrost F-8 stylus properties 109 Control Panel Settings (PsionVU settings) 96 cradle See also vehicle cradle 149 CTRL Key 23 Custom preset B-3 cycle tasks 40

Data Bits, port replicator 104 decoded (internal) scanner parameters C-4 decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters C-7 decoded scanners C-9 decoding barcodes decodes required C-10 Security C-10 DEL (Backspace) Key 23 Delete Char Set ECIs C-7 Demo Scanner 39 Signature 39 Sound 39 Desktop background, choosing 95 desktop connection, remote 97 desktop docking station See docking station, desktop 142 desktop shell appearance 42 desktop themes 95 diagnostics, WWAN network G-12 dialer (phone), using 17, 117 dialing, phone number 17, 117, 118 Diff Read Timeout C-8 Dim For (backlight) 69 dismounting partitions 107 display appearance (colour scheme) 68 background (image) 68 backlight 68 backlight, adjusting 27 Display Properties 68 Display Properties 68 docking device icons 31 docking station 141–142 desktop 142–145 cleaning 144 indicators 144 operation 144 operator controls 141 troubleshooting 145 installation at site 141 ST4004, quad operator controls 146, 147 uploading data using 67 docking stations quad docking station (ST4004) 146 Dot Time C-5, C-10 double-click appending characters to a decoded•arcode 100

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

scanner trigger 100 Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu 85 Double-Tap (stylus settings) 109 Dr. Debug 70 heater control log 71 Driver Mode configuration, WWAN G-11

EA11 2D Imager specifications D-9 EA20X scanner specifications D-10 ECI Decoder C-7 Error Reporting 72 ESC Key 24 Ethernet, connecting with docking station 147 EV15 1D imager scanner specifications D-8

formatting entire memory card 105 partitions 107 freezer keyboards F-5 freezer models, Quick Defrost F-8 FTP Server, Registry Editor 115 Function Keys 36-key keyboard 26 59-key keyboard 25

gang charger 156–158 Glossy surface, Predefined preset B-4 Good Scan Beep 100 Good Scan Vibrates 101 GPRS (Bluetooth) 62 GPS Settings (built-in profiles) 72 Group, preset B-3 GSM/EDGE G-3 GSM/GPRS G-3–G-15 GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-7

hand strap 136 hand strap, installing 137 Hard Reset 16 hard reset 16 headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 59 heater components, System Properties F-11 heater control Dr. Debug log 71 Heater Info (Heater Settings) F-9 Heater Settings Heater Info F-9 HHP 5080 imager specifications D-11 holster, hard shell 137

I 2 of 5 Short Code C-10 Identifier, Default preset group (imaging software) B-3 imager EV15 specifications D-8 HHP 5080 specifications D-11 SE4600LR F-14 two dimensional (2D) imager 34 Imager & Camera settings 75 Imagers applet B-1 Import/Export to File (PsionVU settings) 96 indicators 802.11 radio signal quality 30 battery 30 docking devices 31 LED functions 28

Index

modifier keys 30 onscreen 30 scanner message 33, 34 task bar 37 WWAN radio signal quality 30 Ingenuity (PsionVU Shell), settings 95 input panel (Control Panel) 53 installation hand strap 137 pistol grip 135 Snap Modules 138 vehicle cradle 149 integrated scanner option 32 Intensity (7035 backlighting) 69, 78 Internet Explorer 38 IPv6 116 ISM band, Bluetooth radio 56

keyboard 36-key keyboard 26 alpha keys, 36-key keyboard 26 backlight 78 key repeat 77, 78 One Shot Mode 78 onscreen, Microsoft SIP 76 Properties 77 keyboard keys 22 ALT 23 arrow keys 23 Backspace 23 CTRL 23 DEL 23 ESC 24 function keys, accessing 25 macro keys 26, 79 modifiers 24 navigating using the keyboard 35 SCAN 24 SHIFT 23 SPACE 24 Tab 24 keyboard keys, freezer F-5 Key Repeat tab 77

Laser On Time C-5, C-7 LED charge 29 functions 28 scan 29 troubleshooting quad dock ST4004 148 Linear Predefined preset B-4 Linear and PDF Predefined preset B-4 Linear Security Level C-6 Lithium-ion batteries installing 14 removing 14 Lock Sequence 83 Low light Predefined preset B-4 Low light near Predefined preset B-5 Low power Predefined preset B-4 Low Power Timeout C-5, C-8

Macro keys

36-key keyboard 26 59-key keyboard 26 accessing 26 executing a macro 80 Macros menu, accessing 79 recording and saving 79 maintenance 45 Manage Triggers 84 Matrix Predefined preset B-4 MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-6 memory card creating partitions 106 formatting entire 105 formatting partition 107 messages Scan Indicator 100 scanner warning message 100 Scan Result 100 microphone adjustments 122 microphone gain adjustment 86 microSD Card, inserting 31 Microsoft® ActiveSync® 67 Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) 76 Minimum Cancel Time C-5, C-8 Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting up 67 Model RA2070 radio E-9 modem information, WWAN G-12 modem using VPN clients G-7 modifier keys 24 locking 25 One Shot Mode 78 unlocking 25 Motion, Predefined preset B-5 mounting partitions 108 Multiple Beep Tones 100

network connection, monitoring 131 non-incendive Omnii XT15ni I-3

Omnii approvals E-4 model numbers 4, F-3 specifications E-3 Omnii RT15 specifications E-3 Omnii XT15f specifications F-3 Omnii XT15f, freezer model F-8 Omnii XT15ni (non-incendive) hand-held I-3 Omnii XT15 specifications E-3 On & Off button 15 one dimensional internal scanner 33, 34 One Shot Mode 78 ON For 78 onscreen keyboard, Soft Input Panel (SIP) 53, 76 Open TekTerm application 87 operating system properties 110 orientation, screen 105

pairing Bluetooth devices 59 Parameter Scanning C-5, C-8 Parity, port replicator 104 partitions creating 106 deleting 107 dismounting 107 formatting 107 management 107 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

III

Index

mounting 108 PDF and linear Predefined preset B-4 PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ radio specifications E-7 phone Services, setting up 120 Voicemail, setting up 121 phone, dialing 17, 117 Phonebook 119 phone number, dialing 17, 117, 118 picker cradle, installing cable 153 pinouts A-1 pistol grip, installing 135 pocket PC compatibility 88 port pinouts A-1 Port Replicator settings (COM5 and COM6) Baud 104 Data Bits 104 Parity 104 Port B (COM6), Power 103 Stop Bits 104 Trigger On Sequence 104 ports parameters 103 Postal Predefined preset B-4 Power Button 23 Properties 88 Source 88 to Port B (COM6) 103 Power Management Properties Advanced 90 battery capacity 88 Battery Health 90 Built-in Devices 90 suspend, power saving 88 Suspend Threshold 89 Power Mode Decoded (Internal) Scanner C-5 Predefined preset B-3 All B-4 Glossy surface B-4 imaging software B-4 Linear B-4 Linear and PDF B-4 Low light B-4 Low light near B-5 Low power B-4 Matrix B-4 Motion B-5 Postal B-4 Prefix C-6 Preset (imaging software) Custom B-3 Group B-3 Predefined B-3 Preset Group, Default identifier (imaging software) B-3 Profile restoring backup 113 viewing backup 113 Programs Command Prompt 38 Internet Explorer 38 Remote Desktop Connection 38 Windows Explorer 38 protective case 137 PsionVU menus 92 PsionVU settings Administrator Password 93 Control Panel Settings 96

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Import/Export to File 96 Restrictions 95 Shell Settings 94 PsionVU Shell 42 punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key) 23

Quick Defrost F-8 Quick Defrost (heater settings) F-8 Quick Defrost Settings Quick Defrost F-8

radio 802.11 signal quality 30 Bluetooth 56–65 specifications 802.11a/b/g/n E-9 Bluetooth E-10 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ radio E-7 MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE E-6 WWAN signal quality 30 recalibrating touchscreen 27, 109 Registry Editor 115 Advanced Interface and Network 116 Remote Desktop Connection 38, 97 Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 77 menu (key repeat settings) 77 Rate (of key repeats) 78 resetting Omnii Boot to BooSt 16 clean start 16 Hard Reset 16 hard reset 16 warm reset 16 Restore Now 113 Restrictions (PsionVU settings) 95 return-to-factory warranty 1iii Run (Start Menu) 41

safety instructions battery charger 141 scanner 32 safety warning, scanner 32 Same Read Timeout C-8 Same Read Validate C-8 Scan Data Format C-6 Scan Indicator 100 SCAN Key 24 Scan Log File 101 Scan Mode C-5 scanner Aim Duration C-5 aiming (target) dot duration C-5, C-10 aiming dot duration C-5 appending data 100 Bad Scan Vibrates 101 barcode, appending data to 100 Bi-Direction Redundancy C-6 Click Data (appending data) 100 Click Time (double-click) 100 Codepage 101 Continuous Scan Mode C-8 decoded C-9 decoded (internal) C-4 decoded Intermec (ISCP) C-7 Delete Char Set ECIs C-7 Dot Time C-5

Index

double-click 100 EA11 2D Imager specifications D-9 ECI Decoder C-7 Good Scan Beep 100 Good Scan Vibrates 101 Laser On Time C-5, C-7 Linear Security Level C-6 Low Power Timeout C-5, C-8 Minimum Cancel Time C-5, C-8 Multiple Beep Tones 100 one dimensional (1D) internal scanner 33, 34 Parameter Scanning C-5, C-8 ports parameters 103 Prefix C-6 safety warnings 32 Scan Data Format C-6 scan failure, codepage 101 Scan Indicator 100 Scan Log File 101 Scan Mode C-5 Scan Result Time 100 SE 1224HP specifications D-6 SE 1524 ER specifications D-7 SE955 specifications D-3 SE965 specifications D-4 Security C-10 Short Code C-10 Soft Scan Timeout 101 specifications, internal D-3 Suffix C-6 target dot duration C-5, C-10 techniques (scanning) 33 Transmit Code 1D Char C-6 troubleshooting tips 33 Verify C-10 warning message 100 scanning 1D internal 33, 34 appending characters 100 safety instructions 32 symbologies 98, C-3 Translations tab 101 Scan Result 100 Scan Result Time 100 screen stylus, using to navigate 35 touch pen, using 35 Windows Embedded CE, navigating 35 Screen Rotation 105 SE 1224HP specifications D-6 SE 1524 ER specifications D-7 SE955 specifications D-3 SE965 specifications D-4 Security C-10 See Symbol 24 Services 120 Set for AutoRestore 113 Settings Control Panel 41 Network and Dial-up connections 41 Run 41 Taskbar and Start Menu 41 Shell Settings (PsionVU settings) 94 SHIFT Key 23 Short Code C-10 Shutdown Suspend 42 Shutdown (Start Menu) 42 signal quality, 802.11 30 signal quality, WWAN 30 SIM card, inserting 31

SIP (Soft Input Panel) 76 SMS menu, WWAN G-14 Snap Modules pinouts A-4 ST4000 (power only) 138 ST4001 (USB Host/Client) 138, A-4 ST4005 (USB DE9M) 138, A-4 SNTP, Registry Editor 116 Soft Input Panel Control Panel 53 Microsoft SIP 76 Soft Scan Timeout 101 sound settings 122 SPACE Key 24 specifications camera E-4 EA20X scanner D-10 EV15 1D imager D-8 HHP 5080 imager D-11 Omnii Hand-Held Computer E-3 Omnii XT15f specifications F-3 scanner, internal D-3 Symbol SE4500 imager D-12 Symbol SE4600 imager F-14 ST3002 Arctic battery specifications F-7 ST4000 Snap Module 138 ST4001 Snap Module 138, A-4 ST4004 quad docking station 146 cleaning 148 Ethernet 147 troubleshooting 148 ST4005 Snap Module 138, A-4 Start Menu 38 cycle tasks 40 programs 38 Run 41 Settings 41 Shutdown 42 system tray 40 task manager 40 Stop Bits, port replicator 104 stylus (touch pen), using 35 Stylus Properties 109 Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 109 Suffix C-6 Surface Glossy B-4 Suspend (Shutdown menu) 42 Suspend Timeout 89 swap time (for battery) 21 24 symbologies, barcode 98, C-3 displaying type of barcode 100 Symbol SE4500 imager specifications D-12 Symbol SE4600 imager specifications F-14 Symbol Soft Input Panel (figure) 25 System Properties 110 System Properties, heater components F-11 system tray 40

Tab Key 24 target dot, duration of C-5, C-10 taskbar onscreen indicators 802.11 radio signal quality 30 AC power 30 battery 30 docking devices 31 modifier keys 30 WWAN radio signal quality 30 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Index

using 37 task manager 40 TCP/IP, configuring 128–129 themes, desktop 95 Total Recall AutoRestore Profile 113 backup, creating 111 backup Profile, restoring 113 clone, creating 112 Clone to USB 114 managing profiles 113 Restore Profile 113 Upload to A.R.C. 114 view Profile 113 touch pen, using 35 touchscreen recalibration 27, 109 stylus, using 35 touch pen, using 35 Translations parameters (barcodes) 101 Transmit Code 1D Char C-6 trigger, double-click 100 trigger mappings 84 Trigger On Sequence, port replicator 104 Trigger-Press Type, Manage Triggers menu 86 triggers, configuring 84 troubleshooting ST40004 148 troubleshooting tips (scanning) 33

UMTS/HSPA+ radio specifications E-7 Upload to A.R.C. 114 Use Virtual Serial Port G-7

vehicle cradle 149 powered pinouts A-5 Verify C-10 Voice Call Lists 119 Call Management 119 conference calls 119 dialing a number 118 Phonebook 119 phone dialer 17, 117 phone options 17, 117 Services 120 voicemail, setting up 121 Volume & Sounds Properties 122

warm reset 16 warnings 100 warranty 1iii Wi-Fi Config 123–127 WiFiConnect A.R.C. 131 Windows® Start Menu See Start Menu 38 Windows 7 67 Windows Embedded CE, navigating in 35 Windows Explorer 38 Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up 67 Windows Vista® 67 Wireless WAN G-3–G-15 AT Terminal G-14 Drive Mode configuration G-11 modem information G-12 network diagnostics G-12 SMS Menu G-14 Use Virtual Serial Port G-7 Voice G-15

Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Wireless Zero Config H-1–H-7

XT15ni (non-incendive) hand-held I-3

[PDF] PSION Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual - Free Download PDF (2024)

References